FrameSaverr DSL 9783
USER’S GUIDE
Document No. 9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
About This Guide
H
H
H
H
Purpose and Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Document Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Product-Related Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
1
2
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
H
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
H
FrameSaver DSL Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
FrameSaver DSL Feature Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Advanced SLV Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
OpenLane SLM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
H
H
User Interface and Basic Operation
H
H
H
H
Logging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Screen Work Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Navigating the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Keyboard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Selecting from a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Switching Between Screen Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Selecting a Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3
Configuration Procedures
H
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Configuration Option Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Changing Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Saving Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
Configuration Options
H
H
H
H
H
H
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using the Easy Install Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Configuration Option Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Configuring the Overall System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configuring Service Level Verification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Configuring General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Configuring the Physical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Configuring the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Configuring the User Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Configuring Frame Relay for the Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Configuring ATM for the Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Configuring Circuit and DLCI Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Configuring PVC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Setting Up Management and Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Configuring Node IP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Configuring Management PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Configuring General SNMP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Configuring SNMP NMS Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Configuring SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Configuring the Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Configuring the Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem . . . . . . . . 4-46
H
H
H
H
H
H
5
Security and Logins
H
H
H
H
Limiting Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Controlling External COM Port Device Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Limiting Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Limiting FTP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link . . . . . 5-7
Controlling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Disabling SNMP Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Creating a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Modifying a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Deleting a Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
H
H
H
H
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
Operation and Maintenance
H
H
Displaying System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
LED Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Control Lead Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Device Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
System and Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Self-Test Results Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Last System Reset Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Health and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Test Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
PVC Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Network Interface Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
IP Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Clearing Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
DLCI Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Frame Relay Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
ATM Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Ethernet Performance Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Trap Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
7
FTP Operation
H
FTP File Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Upgrading System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Changing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Transferring Collected Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
8
Troubleshooting
H
H
Problem Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit . . . . . 8-4
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface . . . 8-6
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Trap Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Troubleshooting Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Device Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
ATM Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Frame Relay PVC Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Tests Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Test Timeout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Starting and Stopping a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Aborting All Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
PVC Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
PVC Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Send Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Monitor Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
DTE Loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
IP Ping Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
9
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Setting Up FrameSaver and SLV Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
10 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Discovering FrameSaver Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Configuring the Discovered Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Grouping Elements for Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Generating Reports for a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
About Service Level Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
About At-a-Glance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
About Trend Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Printed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Reports Applicable to FrameSaver SLV Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
H
A Menu Hierarchy
H
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
H
H
H
MIB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
System Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Interfaces Group (mib-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Trap: warmStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Trap: authenticationFailure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Traps: linkUp and linkDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Traps: enterprise-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Traps: RMON-Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
H
H
H
H
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
C Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
H
H
H
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
DSL Network Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
COM Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Data Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Standard V.35 Straight-through Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Ethernet Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
H
H
D Technical Specifications
E Equipment List
H
H
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Index
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Purpose and Intended Audience
This document contains information that applies to the FrameSaver DSL 9783. It
is intended for system designers, engineers, administrators, and operators who
are familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications
equipment and frame relay networks.
Document Organization
Section
Description
Chapter 1
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit. Identifies how the
FrameSaver DSL 9783 fits into Paradyne’s Service Level
Management (SLM) solution, and describes the unit’s
basic features and, if ordered, its advanced Service Level
Verification and Management (SLV and SLM) features.
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
User Interface and Basic Operation. Shows how to
navigate the user interface.
Configuration Procedures. Shows how to access and save
configuration options.
Configuration Options. Describes the configuration options
available on the FrameSaver DSL 9783.
Security and Logins. Provides procedures for controlling
access to the unit and setting up logins.
Operation and Maintenance. Provides procedures to
display unit identification information and perform file
transfers, as well as how to display and interpret status
and statistical information.
Chapter 7
FTP Operation. Shows how to use File Transfer Protocol to
upgrade system software and transfer collected data.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Section
Description
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting. Provides device problem resolution,
alarm, and other information, as well as troubleshooting
and test procedures.
Chapter 9
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices. Identifies
where installation and setup information is located and how
FrameSaver units are supported.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices.
Describes setup of Concord’s Network Health application
so reports can be created for FrameSaver units, and
identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Menu Hierarchy. Contains a graphical representation of
how the user interface screens are organized.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults.
Identifies the MIBs supported and how they can be
downloaded, describes the unit’s compliance with SNMP
format standards and with its special operational trap
features, and describes the RMON-specific user history
groups, and alarm and event defaults.
Appendix C
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments. Shows the
rear panel, tells what cables are needed, and provides pin
assignments for interfaces and cables.
Appendix D
Appendix E
Index
Technical Specifications.
Equipment List.
Lists key terms, acronyms, concepts, and sections.
A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is
available on the World Wide Web at www.paradyne.com. Select Library →
Technical Manuals → Technical Glossary.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Product-Related Documents
Document Number
Document Title
Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation:
9000-A2-GB20
9783-A2-GN10
9783-A2-GL10
Configuring Frame Relay Service Over DSL
FrameSaver DSL 9783 Installation Instructions
FrameSaver DSL 9783 Quick Reference
Paradyne Hotwire Documentation:
8335-A2-GB20
Hotwire ATM Line Cards, Models 8335 and 8365,
User’s Guide
8820-A2-GN20
Hotwire 8820 GranDSLAM Installation Guide
Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation:
7800-A2-GZ41
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX
Quick Start Installation Instructions
7800-A2-GZ42
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for
Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions
NetScout Documentation:
2930-170
NetScout Probe User Guide
2930-610
NetScout Manager/Plus User Guide
2930-620
NetScout Manager/Plus & NetScout Server
Administrator Guide
2930-788
NetScout Manager Plus Set Up & Installation Guide
Concord Communications Documentation:
09-10010-005
09-10020-005
09-10050-002
09-10070-001
Network Health User Guide
Network Health Installation Guide
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide
Network Health Reports Guide
Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at
www.paradyne.com. Select Library → Technical Manuals.
To order a paper copy of this manual:
H
H
Within the U.S.A., call 1-800-PARADYNE (1-800-727-2396)
Outside the U.S.A., call 1-727-530-8623
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Conventions Used
Convention Used
When Used
Italic
To indicate variable information (e.g.,
DLCI nnnn).
Menu selection sequence
To provide an abbreviated method for indicating
the selections to be made from a menu or
selections from within a menu before
performing a procedural step.
For example,
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
indicates that you should select Status from the
Main Menu, then select System and Test Status
from the Status menu).
(Path:)
To provide a check point that coincides with the
menu path shown at the top of the screen.
Always shown within parentheses so you can
verify that you are referencing the correct table
(e.g., Path: main/config/alarm).
Brackets [ ]
To indicate multiple selection choices when
multiple options can be displayed (e.g., Clear
[Network/Port-1] Statistics).
Text highlighted in red
To indicate a hyperlink to additional information
when viewing this manual online. Click on the
highlighted text.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
1
This chapter includes the following:
H
H
H
System Overview
FrameSaver DSL Features and Benefits
FrameSaver DSL Feature Sets
— Basic Features
— Advanced SLV Features
OpenLane SLM System
H
System Overview
Our system solution consists of:
H
H
H
FrameSaverr DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) unit
Hotwirer ATM Line Card in the Hotwire 8820 GranDSLAM
OpenLanet SLM (Service Level Management) system
This solution provides increased manageability, monitoring, and diagnostics so
customers can identify problems more efficiently, troubleshoot those problems
faster, and maximize their network to control costs. It is also compatible with
Concord Communication’s Network Health software.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
FrameSaver DSL Features and Benefits
Large-scale deployment of frame relay services over DSL-based access
networks is possible with the innovative FrameSaver DSL, which provides
important advantages for frame relay service providers.
H
H
Remote diagnostic and service level management (SLM) functionality allows
service providers to install the unit and verify operation quickly and reliably.
Superior fault isolation and test capabilities allow both the Competitive Local
Exchange Carrier (CLEC) and the Frame Relay Network Service Provider
(FR NSP) to resolve problems quickly and efficiently.
H
H
H
End-to-end service level reporting capabilities make this the ideal platform to
support managed frame relay services with service level guarantees.
Reduces operations cost by allowing Network Operations Center (NOC)
center personnel to remotely troubleshoot and diagnose problems.
Optional SLV key turns on historical reporting of service level metrics,
allowing this device to be deployed as part of a fully managed service with
SLA reporting.
H
H
High-speed and lower access cost of DSL functionality provides service
providers critical capabilities necessary to target markets currently served by
dial or VSAT services.
Use of ATM as a transport protocol ensures the required quality of service for
each application across the access network.
Features
Specific FrameSaver DSL features include:
H
H
Basic DSU/CSU functionality
Two feature sets:
— Frame aware diagnostic feature set
— Advanced SLM and reporting feature set
Frame aware diagnostic feature set includes:
— Nondisruptive PVC diagnostics
— Basic frame relay statistics
H
— PVC burst table
— Real-time connectivity test and latency snapshots
— RMON2 event log
— RMON2 user history statistics
— Multiplexed management PVCs
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
H
Advanced SLM and reporting feature set includes all of the diagnostic feature
set, plus:
— CIR relationship statistics
— FDR/DDR (Trueput) reporting
— Continuous real-time latency report
— RMON2 alarms and proactive thresholds
— FTP user history poller for graphical and historical reporting
Performs FRF.8 (transparent mode) for frame to ATM conversion
ATM OA&M loopbacks
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
LMI Trace & Display
Routing Table Display
Router independent operation
Ethernet port for local management
Intelligent data delivery, latency and burst analyzer features
Performance monitoring and data collection
Integrated SNMP agent, TELNET, and ASCII terminal management
interfaces with multilevel password protection
H
H
H
Dual Flash Storage areas and in-band FTP software download
OpenLane PVC/VC Provisioning Application
Interoperates with the Hotwire ATM Line Card, supporting rates from 144 to
2320 kbps at distances of up to 20,000 feet (6.1 km)
H
H
Automatically selects the optimal rate using the Conexant AutoBaud
algorithm
Monitors and makes available DSL performance information:
Through asynchronous terminal interface screens:
— Noise margin
— Receiver attenuation
— Loss of Signal (LOS)
— Net margin threshold exceeded
— Current SDSL rate
As SNMP traps and RMON2 Event Log objects:
— Loss of Signal
— Net margin threshold exceeded
— Rate change
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
An advanced SLM and reporting feature set can be activated on command with
the SLV key. In the base configuration, comprehensive Layer 1 and 2
instrumentation allows service providers to isolate, diagnose, and correct
problems remotely from their NOC. FR NSPs can expect fewer truck rolls and
faster service turn-up times. FrameSaver DSL carries forward the end-to-end,
nondisruptive loopback capabilities found in all FrameSaver products, allowing
quick verification of circuit operation from customer premises to customer
premises. Continuity and latency can be verified prior to cutover or any time
thereafter.
When the SLV key is remotely activated, additional historical reporting capabilities
are activated. Service level performance reporting in compliance with FRF.13 is
possible.
Since FrameSaver DSL operates with other members of the FrameSaver product
family, DSL, DDS, T1, E1, NxT1 or T3/E3 circuits can be mixed on the same
customer network. This hybrid circuit approach meets the practical needs of the
service providers in advance of 100 percent DSL geographic coverage, and
allows FR NSPs to partner with the most cost efficient access providers for any
location.
Working in concert with the Hotwire GranDSLAM and the Hotwire ATM SDSL
card, quality of service control spans the entire network eliminating the
uncertainty of best effort network designs. CBR, VBR-rt, VBR-nrt, and UBR are
supported.
Benefits
FrameSaver DSL provides all the benefits of world-class diagnostics and SLM
with the cost advantages of DSL access:
H
H
H
ATM Transport with QoS to insure necessary Quality of Service across the
entire network
Base configuration provides comprehensive diagnostics and reporting
capabilities
Command activated SLV key provides additional service level management
and historical reporting capabilities
H
H
Reduces operational costs through proactive and historical diagnostics
Nondisruptive, end-to-end diagnostics allow accurate fault isolation and
speedy trouble-ticket closure without customer disruption or LEC
coordination.
H
H
Software downloadability and adherence to standards protects investments
and reduces life-cycle costs
Provides conversion between ATM F4/F5 OA&M and Frame Relay LMI
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
The following diagram shows the FrameSaver DSL unit in a frame relay network.
DSL Provider's
OpenLane
Network
Frame Relay
NMS
OpenLane
NMS
Operations
Center
NSP's
Network
Operations
Center
DSL ATM
Customer Premises
Access
Frame Relay
Network
POWER
ALARMS
Network
Frame
Relay
A
B
F
a
n
M
a
j
o
r
M
i
n
o
r
DSL
Copper
Loop
ATM
PVC
N
POWER ENTR
LEFT UNIT
RIGHT UNIT
Y
:
:
MODULE
LINE
LINE
A
N
P
O
W
E
R
E
UNIT
N
T
R
Y
:
:
MODULE
LINE
LINE
C
L
O
C
K
S
E
R
I
A
L
A
C
R
B
L
E
F
T
A
B
A
M
C
C
A
L
ARM
G
48VR
R
I
G
H
T
U
N
I
T
2
1
4
3
6
5
LAN/WAN SLO
A
T
8
7
10
G
12
14
16
15
18
17
W
A
R
N
I
N
G
!
P
O
W
E
R
M
U
S
T
B
E
B
E
F
O
R
E
R
E
M
O
V
I
N
G
O
R
I
N
S
T
A
L
I
S
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
E
D
A
T
T
H
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
E
WARNING! POWER MUST BE DISCO
BEFORE RE
L
I
N
G
T
H
I
S
P
W
R
E
N
T
R
Y
MODUL
MOVING OR INSTALLING THIS PW
R
NNECTED
A
ENTR
T
T
H
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
Y
MODULE
B
SERIAL ALARM
SMCM
CLOCK
9
B
11
13
Frame Relay
CPE
Router/FRAD
FrameSaver
DSL Unit
Hotwire
8820
GranDSLAM
ATM
Switch
ATM
Switch
FR
Switch
FR Switch
with FR/ATM
Service
Interworking
00-16770
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
FrameSaver DSL Feature Sets
Depending upon the model ordered, the FrameSaver DSL unit has the basic
FrameSaver frame relay and diagnostic capability, or it is enhanced with
additional SLV (Service Level Verification) reporting capability. These are referred
to as feature sets, which provide different levels of intelligence for monitoring,
managing, and reporting performance of the unit.
The two feature sets include:
H
Basic Feature Set. Models with this feature set provide basic capability,
which includes the following:
— Device Health and Status
— Layer 1 (Physical) and Layer 2 (Frame Relay) performance statistics
— Nondisruptive Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) diagnostics
— A troubleshooting virtual circuit for DSL access provider use and remote
management
— Limited RMON (Remote Monitoring) functionality
— Multiplexed management PVCs for use by the frame relay network
service provider or customer
See Basic Features for other features and additional information.
H
Advanced SLV Feature Set. Models with this feature set (sometimes
referred to as Feature Set or Group 2) provide all the basic capability, plus
advanced SLV (Service Level Verification) features. When additional SLV
data is collected and the unit is accessed from an OpenLane SLM system,
Web access to the following information is available:
— TruePutt Technology using Frame and Data Delivery Ratios
— Web browser access to all diagnostic and reporting functions
— Historical SLA (Service Level Agreement) verification and trend reports
— Real-time RMON (remote monitoring) alarms and configurable alarm
thresholds
— Real-time and historical network performance graphs
— Multiplexed customer PVCs
See Advanced SLV Features for other features and more information about
the additional SLV capability.
You can activate the additional SLV features at any time by ordering a
FrameSaver SLV Activation Certificate. You must have the OpenLane SLM
system to activate the additional SLV features in the unit.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
To obtain an activation certificate, provide the model number (9783), your
OpenLane system license key number, and the number of FrameSaver units
whose SLV capability is to be activated. When you receive your certificate, it will
include an Activation Certificate number, the Feature Group Number for the
additional SLV features (Feature Group 2), your OpenLane license key number,
and the number of device activations (license keys) ordered.
When ready to activate SLV capability in the unit(s), run the OpenLane SLM
application. It will prompt you for the serial numbers of the units to be activated,
their IP addresses, and whether the activations will be immediate or scheduled.
OpenLane then activates SLV capability in the designated units and the units are
reset. A report summary will be available that provides information about
the activation certificate, the activated units, and the number of license keys
remaining.
The following table summarizes the features that are included in the two feature
sets. See Basic Features and Advanced SLV Features for additional information.
Feature Set
Advanced
Basic
Yes
SLV
Yes
Yes
Feature
Frame relay performance statistics
SLV performance statistics
(e.g., FDR/DDR, latency, CIR/EIR relationships)
No
Trap Log
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multiplexed user data DLCIs
Troubleshooting DLCI for remote management
Yes
Yes
Layer 2 (data link) diagnostics
(nondisruptive DLCI loopbacks)
PVC Burst Table
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User history available via SNMP RMON2 polling
User history available via FTP
RMON alarms and proactive alarm thresholds
OpenLane SLM system real-time applications
No
Limited
(no SLM)
OpenLane SLM system historical reports and graphs
NetScout Manager Plus support
No
Yes
Alarms and
history
Alarms and
history
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
Basic Features
The FrameSaver DSL unit provides the following features:
H
Easy Installation. When AutoBaud is used, no configuration is required.
SNMP options may be modified if desired to provide security and enable
traps.
H
Frame Relay Aware Management. Supports diagnostic and network
management features over the frame relay network. The unit’s frame relay
capability also supports:
— Inband management channels over the frame relay network using
dedicated PVCs.
— Unique nondisruptive diagnostics.
— CIR monitoring on a PVC basis.
— Multiple PVCs on an interface.
— Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs.
— Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single
network PVC.
H
H
Router-Independence. Unique diagnostics, performance monitoring,
PVC-based in-band network management, and SNMP connectivity is not
dependent upon external routers, cables, or LAN adapters.
Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support. Provides Inverse ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) support so the frame relay router at one end of a
management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the
other end of the PVC. Standard RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows the
router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to
that FrameSaver unit.
H
H
Security. Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access
to the unit.
Auto-Configuration. Provides the following automatic configuration features:
— CIR Determination – For automatic recalculation of the committed rate
measurement interval (T ) and excess burst size (B ) when a DLCI’s CIR
c
e
changes.
— Excess burst size (B ) and committed burst size (B ) are recalculated
e
c
when Committed Burst Size B (Bits) is set to CIR. The committed rate
c
measurement interval (T ) is recalculated when Committed Burst Size B
c
c
(Bits) is set to Other.
H
Configurable FTP Transfer Rate. Allows you to control the transmit rate
used for downloading from the FrameSaver unit and uploading user history
statistics to an NMS (Network Management System) via the COM port
connection or a management PVC so the data can be transferred as a
background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) over
extended periods of time using low bandwidth.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
H
H
Dual Flash Memory. Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and
running. Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user’s
discretion.
Multiplexed Management PVCs. Provides a method of multiplexing
management data with customer data transparently over a single PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuit) when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the
circuit. This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests.
H
Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported.
Models
9783-A1-211
9783-A1-221
9783-A1-213
9783-A1-223
Feature
Through Connections (PVCs)
Dedicated Management PVCs
8
2
64
2
H
H
ATM VPI/VCI and DLCI Correlation. For networks with both ATM and frame
relay-access endpoints, allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating
Virtual Path and Channel Identifier (VPI/VCI) in the far-end ATM-access
endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped. This occurs when the FrameSaver
unit is operating in frame relay mode.
Frame Relay Traffic Policing. Ensures proper alignment and correlation of
CIR (Committed Information Rate) values between the FrameSaver unit and
the frame relay interworking function on the network switch. When this
feature is enabled, the unit can enforce CIR and EIR (Excess Information
Rate), marking frames that exceed CIR as DE (Discard Eligible) using the
same method used by the switch, and discarding frames whose transmission
would cause committed burst size (B ) and excess burst size (B ) to be
c
e
exceeded.
H
RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling. Provides
access to ESF line, physical interface, and basic frame relay performance
statistics by polling the FrameSaver unit using SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). These statistics are available real-time via the
Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object.
H
H
Trap Event Log. Shows the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
trap event log for the FrameSaver unit, with the most recent events first,
keeping a running total for all trap events stored, the amount of time since the
event was logged, plus a description of the trap.
Extensive Testing Capability. Provides a variety of tests to identify
and diagnose device and network problems, including nondisruptive PVC
loopbacks and end-to-end connectivity. Tests can be commanded from the
unit’s menu-driven user interface or the OpenLane system.
These tests include V.54 or FT1-ANSI data channel loopback support so the
frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its
own switch without having to contact the local service provider for loopback
activation.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
H
LMI Packet Capture. Provides a way of uploading data that has been
captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a
Network Associates Sniffer for analysis, or viewed via the menu-driven user
interface. When viewed from the menu-driven user interface, the 12 most
recent LMI messages are displayed.
Advanced SLV Features
The following additional features are provided with the advanced SLV feature set:
H
H
TruePutt Technology. Using Frame Delivery Ratios (FDR) and Data
Delivery Ratios (DDR), throughput (within and above CIR, as well as between
CIR and EIR, and above EIR) can be measured precisely, eliminating
inaccuracies due to averaging.
Intelligent Service Level Verification. Provides accurate throughput,
latency, and availability measurements to determine network performance
and whether SLAs (Service Level Agreements) are being met, along with
SLA reporting.
H
H
RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds. Provides the ability
to change SLA parameter and RMON alarm thresholds via the OpenLane
system to correct them in real-time, before the SLA is violated.
Multiplexed Customer PVCs. Provides a method of multiplexing customer
management data and user data with network management data
transparently over a single PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) when
FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit.
H
H
FTP User History Poller. Provides a bulk collector using FTP through the
OpenLane system that generates a file for data at the time that data is
uploaded using FTP.
RMON-Based User History Statistics Gathering. Provides everything
needed to monitor network service levels, plus throughput with accurate data
delivery, network latency, and LMI and PVC availability. Continuous roundtrip
latency testing and reporting, as well as CIR to transmitted and received data
performance statistics, are included.
In addition, port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for
accurate calculation of utilization.
H
Network User History Synchronization. Allows correlation of RMON2
User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network. Using a central
clock, called the network reference time, all SLV device user history statistics
are synchronized across the network, further enhancing the accuracy of
OpenLane SLV reports.
See OpenLane SLM System for additional information.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
OpenLane SLM System
Being standards-based, the OpenLane SLM (Service Level Management)
system can be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or
IBM’s NetView. OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating
OpenLane features with the OpenView Web interface.
Being Web-based, the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data
contained in the database to provide anytime, anywhere access to this
information via a Web browser.
Some of the OpenLane system’s features include:
H
Real-time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement
details (not averages, which can skew performance results) of service level
agreement (SLA) parameters.
H
H
Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so
frame relay SLAs can be verified.
Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy-to-use tool for performing tests,
which include end-to-end, PVC loopback, connectivity, and physical interface
tests.
H
H
Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices, and set
RMON alarms and thresholds. Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be
assigned.
Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their
SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered
automatically, along with their PVCs.
H
H
A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system.
Firmware downloading provides an easy-to-use tool for downloading to an
entire network or a portion of the network.
H
H
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices, and SNMP polling and reporting
are available.
Configuration of circuits across the Hotwire GranDSLAM and endpoint for
easy provisioning by the DSL router.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the FrameSaver DSL Unit
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and
Basic Operation
2
This chapter explains how to access, use, and navigate the menu-driven user
interface. It includes the following:
H
H
H
H
Logging On
Main Menu
Screen Work Areas
Navigating the Screens
— Keyboard Keys
— Function Keys
— Selecting from a Menu
— Switching Between Screen Areas
— Selecting a Field
— Entering Information
What appears on the screens depends on:
H
H
Current configuration – How your network is currently configured.
Security access level – The security level set by the system administrator
for each user.
H
Data selection criteria – What you entered in previous screens.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Logging On
Start a session using one of the following methods:
H
Telnet session via:
— An in-band management channel through the frame relay network (frame
relay network service provider).
— An in-band management channel through the ATM network (DSL
provider).
— A local in-band management channel configured on the DTE port
between the FrameSaver unit and the router.
— A LAN port.
H
H
Dial-in connection using an external modem.
Direct terminal connection over the COM port.
When logging on, the User Interface Idle screen appears.
H
H
If no security was set up or security was disabled, the Main Menu screen
appears (see Main Menu on page 2-4). You can begin your session.
If security was set up and is enabled, you are prompted for a login. Enter
your login ID and password.
When the user interface has been idle, a session is automatically ended and the
screen goes blank when the unit times out. Press Enter to reactivate the
interface.
" Procedure
To log in when security is being enforced:
1. Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter.
2. Type your Password and press Enter.
— Valid characters – All printable ASCII characters
— Number of characters – Up to 10 characters can be entered in the
Login ID and Password fields
— Case-sensitive – Yes
An asterisk (*) appears in the password field for each character entered.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
If your login was . . .
Then the . . .
Valid
Main Menu appears. Begin your session.
NOTE: If your login is valid, but access is denied, there
are two currently active sessions.
Invalid
Message, Invalid Password, appears on line 24, and
the Login screen is redisplayed.
After three unsuccessful attempts:
H A Telnet session is closed.
H The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly
connected terminal or modem.
H An SNMP trap is generated.
H Access is denied.
See your system administrator to verify your login (Login
ID/Password combination).
FrameSaver units support two sessions simultaneously. If two sessions are
currently active, wait and try again.
H
If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the
unit through Telnet, the local Telnet client process returns a Connection
refused:message at the bottom of the screen.
H
If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit
over the COM port (using a terminal or external modem, not via Telnet), the
User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed. In addition, the type of
connection (Telnet Connection or Direct COM Port Connection) for each
current user is identified, along with the user’s login ID.
" Procedure
To end the session:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function keys area of the screen.
2. Type e (Exit) and press Enter.
— For a terminal-connected to the COM port, the session is ended.
— For a modem connected to the COM port, the session is ended and the
modem is disconnected.
— For a Telnet connection, the session is closed and, if no other Telnet or
FTP session is occurring over the connection, the modem is
disconnected.
If ending a session from the Configuration branch, see Saving Configuration
Options in Chapter 3, Configuration Procedures.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Main Menu
Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit’s tasks begins at the Main Menu, which has
six menus or branches. The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears
when security has been set up.
main
Access Level: 1
MAIN MENU
9783
05/13/2000 02:01
Device Name: Node A
Status
Test
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Control
Easy Install
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions Exit
Select . . .
To . . .
Status
View diagnostic tests, interfaces, PVC connections, and
statistics. You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit
identity information.
Test
Select and cancel tests for the FrameSaver unit’s interfaces.
Display and edit the configuration options.
Configuration
Auto-Configuration
Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a
selected application. You can also automatically populate
network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric
settings.
Control
Control the menu-driven user interface, device naming, login
administration, and selecting software releases. You can also
initiate a power-on reset of the FrameSaver unit.
Easy Install
Select Leased Line or Frame Relay mode for minimal
configuration and a quick installation.
See Appendix A, Menu Hierarchy, for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy,
which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit’s menus and screens.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Screen Work Areas
There are two user work areas:
H
H
Screen area – Where you input information into fields.
Function keys area – Where you perform specific screen functions.
Model Number
Date and Time
Menu Path
main/config/system/slv..
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 02:02
Device
Name
SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS
SLV Sample Interval (secs):
60
SLV Delivery Ratio:
Disable
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout:
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold:
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold: 1
Enable
3
Screen
Area
SLV Packet Size (bytes):
SLV Synchronization Role:
64
Tributary
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Function
Keys Area
Message Area
Screen Format Description
Menu Path
Menu selections made to reach the current screen.
Customer-assigned identification of the FrameSaver unit.
Device Name
FrameSaver unit’s model number.
9783
H This is a remote-site unit that supports 8 PVCs.
H This is a central-site unit that supports 64 PVCs.
9783-C
9783-SLV
H This is a remote-site unit that supports 8 PVCs and has the
advanced SLV feature set installed.
This is a central-site unit that supports 64 PVCs and has the
9783-C-SLV
Screen Area
advanced SLV feature set installed.
Selection, display, and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the
FrameSaver unit.
Function Keys
Area
Specific functions that can be performed by pressing a specified key,
then pressing Enter.
Message Area
System-related information and valid settings for input fields in the
lower left corner.
System and Test Status messages in the lower right corner.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Navigating the Screens
You can navigate the screens by:
H
H
Using keyboard keys.
Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys.
Keyboard Keys
Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area:
Press . . .
To . . .
Ctrl-a
Move cursor between the screen area and the
screen function keys area.
Esc
Return to the previous screen.
Right Arrow (on same screen row), or Move cursor to the next field.
Tab (on any screen row)
Left Arrow (on same screen row), or
Ctrl-k
Move cursor to the previous field.
Backspace
Move cursor one position to the left or to the
last character of the previous field.
Spacebar
Select the next valid value for the field.
Delete character that the cursor is on.
Delete (Del)
Up Arrow or Ctrl-u
Move cursor up one field within a column on the
same screen.
Down Arrow or Ctrl-d
Right Arrow or Ctrl-f
Left Arrow or Ctrl-b
Ctrl-l
Move cursor down one field within a column on
the same screen.
Move cursor one character to the right if in edit
mode.
Move cursor one character to the left if in edit
mode.
Redraw the screen display, clearing information
typed in but not yet entered.
Enter (Return)
Accept entry or, when pressed before entering
data or after entering invalid data, display valid
options on the last row of the screen.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Function Keys
All function keys (located in the lower part of the screen; see the example in
Screen Work Areas on page 2-5) operate the same way throughout the screens.
They are not case-sensitive, so upper- or lowercase letters can be used
interchangeably.
These keys use the following conventions:
For the screen
Select . . .
M or m
E or e
N or n
O or o
L or l
And press Enter to . . .
function . . .
MainMenu
Exit
Return to the Main Menu screen.
Terminate the menu-driven user interface session.
Enter new data.
New
Modify
Modify existing data.
Delete
Save
Delete data.
S or s
R or r
Save information.
Refresh
ClrStats
Update screen with current information.
C or c
Clear network performance statistics and refresh the
screen.
Variations include:
H ClrSLV&DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI
statistics.
H ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics.
Display the previous page.
U or u
D or d
PgUp
PgDn
Display the next page.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Selecting from a Menu
" Procedure
To select from a menu:
1. Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection,
or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list.
Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor
from position to position.
2. Press Enter. The selected menu or screen appears.
" Procedure
To return to a previous screen, press the Escape (Esc) key until you reach the
desired screen.
Switching Between Screen Areas
Use Ctrl-a to switch between screen areas (see the example in Screen Work
Areas on page 2-5).
" Procedure
To switch to the function keys area:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area.
2. Select either the function’s designated (underlined) character or
Tab to the desired function key.
3. Press Enter. The function is performed.
To return to the screen area, press Ctrl-a again.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
Selecting a Field
Once you reach the desired menu or screen, select a field to view or change, or
issue a command.
Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another. The
current setting or value appears to the right of the field.
Entering Information
You can enter information in one of three ways. Select the field, then:
H
Manually type in (enter) the field value or command.
Example:
Entering bjk as a user’s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen (from the
Control menu/branch).
H
H
Type in (enter) the first letter(s) of a field value or command, using the unit’s
character-matching feature.
Example:
When configuring a port’s physical characteristics with the Port (DTE)
Initiated Loopbacks configuration option/field selected (possible settings
include Disable, Local, DTPLB, DCLB, and Both), entering d or D displays
the first value starting with d – Disable. In this example, entering dt or DT
would display DTPLB as the selection.
Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated
function key.
Example:
To save a configuration option change, select Save. S or s is the designated
function key.
If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections, press the
spacebar; the first valid setting for the field appears. Continue pressing the
spacebar to scroll through other possible settings.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Interface and Basic Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
3
This chapter includes the following:
H
Basic Configuration
— Configuration Option Areas
— Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options
— Changing Configuration Options
— Saving Configuration Options
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
Basic Configuration
Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver DSL Unit operates.
Use the unit’s Configuration Edit/Display menu to display or change configuration
option settings.
The Configuration Edit/Display menu of the FrameSaver DSL Unit is shown
below.
Configuration Menu
main/config
9783
Device Name: Node A
05/13/2000 03:01
CONFIGURATION EDIT/DISPLAY
System
Network
Data Ports
PVC Connections
Management and Communication
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
Configuration Option Areas
The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings, which are
located in the Factory Default Configuration option area. You can find the default
settings for configuration options in the:
H
H
FrameSaver DSL 9783 Quick Reference
Configuration Option Tables in Chapter 4, Configuration Options
If the factory default settings do not support your network’s configuration, you can
customize the configuration options to better suit your application.
Four configuration option storage areas are available.
Configuration Option Area Description
Current Configuration
The currently active set of configuration options.
Customer Configuration 1
An alternate set of configuration options that the
customer can set up and store for future use.
Customer Configuration 2
Another alternate set of configuration options that the
customer can set up and store for future use.
Default Factory Configuration A read-only configuration area containing the factory
default set of configuration options.
You can load and edit default factory configuration
settings, but you can only save those changes to the
Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2 configuration
option areas.
The Current, Customer 1, and Customer 2 configuration
option areas are identical to the Default Factory
Configuration until modified by the customer.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options
To access and display configuration options, load (copy) the applicable
configuration option set into the edit area.
" Procedure
To load a set of configuration options for editing:
1. From the Main Menu, press the down arrow key so the cursor is on
Configuration.
2. Press Enter to display the Configuration menu. The Load Configuration
From: menu appears.
NOTE:
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer
Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time. Allow a minute or more
for the file to be loaded.
3. Select the configuration option area from which you want to load
configuration options and press Enter (Current Configuration, Customer
Configuration 1, Customer Configuration 2, or Default Factory Configuration).
The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit
area and the Configuration Edit/Display menu appears.
This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
Changing Configuration Options
" Procedure
To change configuration option settings:
1. From the Configuration Edit/Display menu, select a set of configuration
options and press Enter.
For example:
Configuration → PVC Connections
2. Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network, and
make appropriate changes to the setting(s). See Chapter 2, User Interface
and Basic Operation, for additional information.
When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs, some
configuration options will be blank. For a valid setting to appear, Tab to the
configuration option and press the spacebar.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete.
NOTE:
— Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options.
— Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and
run tests.
— Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options; they
cannot change configuration options or run tests.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Procedures
Saving Configuration Options
When changes to the configuration options are complete, use the Save function
key to save your changes to either the Current, Customer 1, or Customer 2
configuration areas.
NOTE:
When changing settings, you must Save for changes to take effect.
" Procedure
To save the configuration option changes:
1. Press Ctrl-a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen.
2. Type s or S to select the Save function and press Enter.
The Save Configuration To: screen appears.
NOTE:
If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes, a Save
Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response.
— If you select No, the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes
are not saved.
— If you select Yes, the Save Configuration To: screen appears.
3. Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes
(usually the Current Configuration) and press Enter.
When Save is complete, Command Completeappears in the message area
at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE:
There are other methods of changing configurations, like SNMP and
Auto-Configuration. Since multiple sessions can be active at the same
time, the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes
being made. For instance:
— Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration
changes made via another method to be lost.
— If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and
saves them, your changes would be lost.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
4
Overview
A variety of configuration options are provided, but not ordinarily required. The
recommended configuration tool for the FrameSaver DSL unit is the OpenLane
Service Level Management system.
This chapter includes the following:
H
H
H
H
H
Using the Easy Install Feature
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP
Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock
Configuration Option Tables
Configuring the Overall System
— Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System
— Configuring Service Level Verification Options
— Configuring General System Options
Configuring the Physical Interfaces
H
— Configuring the Network Interface
— Configuring the User Data Port
H
H
H
H
Configuring Frame Relay for the Data Port
Configuring ATM for the Network Interface
Configuring Circuit and DLCI Records
Configuring PVC Connections
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
H
Setting Up Management and Communication Options
— Configuring Node IP Information
— Configuring Management PVCs
— Configuring General SNMP Management
— Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support
— Configuring SNMP NMS Security
— Configuring SNMP Traps
— Configuring the Ethernet Port
— Configuring the Communication Port
— Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Using the Easy Install Feature
An Easy Install screen is provided for custom configurations, but is not required
for normal installation.
The Easy Install feature allows minimal configuration of the FrameSaver DSL
Unit. Once the unit is installed and minimal configuration is completed using Easy
Install, the NOC (Network Operation Center) can complete configuration of the
unit and verify the setup.
Main Menu → Easy Install
Easy Install Screen Example
main/easy_install
9783
Device Name: Node A
05/13/2000 04:01
EASY INSTALL
Node IP Address:
000.000.000.000 Clear
Node Subnet Mask:
TS Access: VPI,VCI
000.000.000.000 Clear
0 , 35
Create a Dedicated Network Management Link
Ethernet Port Options Screen
Network 1 DSL Line Rate (Kbps)
AutoRate
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
Save
MainMenu
Exit
Table 4-1, Easy Install Configuration Options, describes the entries on the Easy
Install screen.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-1. Easy Install Configuration Options (1 of 2)
Node IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.
Node Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node. Since the subnet mask is not
bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can
be viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is
all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the
IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C:
255.255.255.000.
TS Access (Type)
Possible Settings: None, VPI,VCI, DLCI_on_VPI,VCI
Default Setting: VPI,VCI
Specifies whether a DLCI or Virtual Circuit (VC) is defined for troubleshooting by the
service provider.
None – No troubleshooting link is defined.
VPI,VCI – A troubleshooting VC is defined. Its identifiers must be entered in the next
field.
DLCI_on_VPI,VCI – A DLCI is defined on a specified VC. The identifiers must be
entered in the following fields.
TS Access (DLCI)
Possible Settings: 16–1007
Default Setting: blank
Specifies the DLCI on the network interface to be used for troubleshooting by the
service provider.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when TS Access type is
DLCI_on_VPI,VCI.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI.
TS Access (VPI)
Possible Settings: 0–15
Default Setting: 0
Specifies the VPI on the network interface to be used for troubleshooting by the service
provider. VPI 0, VCI 35 is the default management path between the FrameSaver DSL
unit and the Hotwire GranDSLAM.
0 – 15 – Specifies the VPI.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-1. Easy Install Configuration Options (2 of 2)
TS Access (VCI)
Possible Settings: 32–255
Default Setting: 0
Specifies the VCI on the network interface to be used for troubleshooting by the service
provider. VPI 0, VCI 35 is the default management path between the FrameSaver DSL
unit and the Hotwire GranDSLAM.
32 – 255 – Specifies the VCI.
Create a Dedicated Network Management Link
With the cursor on the Create a Dedicated Network Management Link field, press Enter.
When prompted, enter a DLCI for the link from 16 to 1007. The management link DLCI
is added or modified.
Ethernet Port Options Screen
With the cursor on the Ethernet Port Options Screen field, press Enter. The Ethernet
Port Options screen appears. See Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 4-40.
After configuring the Ethernet port configuration options, save your changes. Then
press the Esc key to return to the Easy Install screen.
Network 1 DSL Line Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: AutoRate, 144, 192, 272, 384, 400, 528, 768, 1168, 1552, 2320
Default Setting: AutoRate
Determines whether the rate on the DSL interface is automatically detected using the
Conexant AutoBaud algorithm, or set to a specific value.
144 – 2320 – The DSL line rate is set to the specified value.
AutoRate – The DSL line rate is automatically detected from the DSL interface.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP
Using the system’s standard Routing Information Protocol (RIP) feature, routing
information is passed to the router over the management PVC, so the router can
learn routes to FrameSaver devices. The Node IP address must be set (see
Configuring Node IP Information).
" Procedure
1. Configure the router to receive RIP.
For example, if using a Cisco router, configure config-t, router RIP,
int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1, then ctl-z WR.
2. Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port.
Configuration → Data Ports → DLCI Records
3. Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured.
Configuration → Management and Communication → Management PVCs
4. Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out, and Save the configuration.
Refer to Table 4-9, DLCI Record Options, and Table 4-12, Management PVC
Options for configuration information.
Entering System Information and
Setting the System Clock
Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the
unit, its location, and a contact for the unit, as well as to set the system clock.
Main Menu → Control → System Information
The following information is available for viewing. Save any entries or changes.
If the selection is . . . Enter the . . .
Device Name
Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters.
SNMP system name; can be up to 255 characters.
System Name
System Location
System Contact
System’s physical location; can be up to 255 characters.
Name and how to contact the system person; can be up to
255 characters.
Date
Time
Current date in the month/day/year format (mm/dd/yyyy).
Current time in the hours:minutes format (hh:mm).
NOTE:
To clear existing information, place the cursor in the Clear field (Tab to the
Clear field) and press Enter.
See Chapter 5, Security and Logins, to set up and administer logins.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuration Option Tables
Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order,
even though this may not be the order in which you access each when
configuring the unit.
The following configuration option tables are included:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options
Table 4-4. General System Options
Table 4-5. Network Physical Interface Options
Table 4-6. Data Port Physical Interface Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Frame Relay Options
Table 4-8. Network ATM Options
Table 4-9. DLCI Record Options
Table 4-10. PVC Connection Options
Table 4-11. Node IP Options
Table 4-12. Management PVC Options
Table 4-13. General SNMP Management Options
Table 4-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options
Table 4-15. SNMP NMS Security Options
Table 4-16. SNMP Traps Options
Table 4-17. Ethernet Port Options
Table 4-18. Communication Port Options
Table 4-19. External Modem (COM Port) Options
Configuring the Overall System
The System menu includes the following:
H
H
H
Frame Relay and LMI
Service Level Verification
General
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System
Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the
Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system (see Table 4-2).
Main Menu → Configuration → System → Frame Relay and LMI
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (1 of 2)
LMI Behavior
Possible Settings: Independent,
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1,
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1,
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1
Default Setting: Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1
Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI on Port-1 or ILMI on the network
interface to be passed from one interface to another, determining how the unit will
handle a change in the LMI or ILMI state. Sometimes referred to as LMI pass-through.
Independent – Handles the state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of
Port-1 has no effect on the ILMI state of the network interface, and vice versa.
Net1-FR1_Follows_Port-1 – Brings VCs cross-connected to Port-1 down on the
network interface when LMI on Port-1 goes down. When LMI on Port-1 comes back up,
the network VCs are reenabled. Used at central sites, this setting is useful when the
remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a
redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure. Not
recommended for NSPs.
Port-1_Follows_Net1-FR1 – Brings LMI down on Port-1 upon a physical failure or ATM
failure. When the alarm on the network interface is cleared, Port-1 is reenabled and its
control leads are reasserted. This setting is useful if the router connected to Port-1 is
used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected.
Port-1_Codependent_with_Net1-FR1 – Brings VCs cross-connected to Port-1 down
on the network interface when LMI on Port-1 goes down (or LMI down on Port-1 when a
physical failure or ATM failure occurs on the network interface), and brings VCs
cross-connected to Port-1 up on the network interface when LMI on Port-1 comes up (or
LMI up on Port-1 when a physical failure or ATM failure is cleared on the network
interface). Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit. Note
that when the router is disconnected, the NSP cannot access the unit using multiplexed
VCs.
Traffic Policing
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether or not CIR (Committed Information Rate) and EIR (Excess
Information Rate) will be enforced by the unit on frames being sent on network frame
relay links.
Enable – CIR and EIR are enforced.
– Frames that exceed CIR will be marked Discard Eligible (DE). These frames are
counted in the Above CIR but within EIRcategory until this category is full.
Once full, additional frames are counted as being in the Within CIRcategory.
– Frames in excess of EIR will be discarded.
Disable – CIR and EIR are not enforced.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-2. System Frame Relay and LMI Options (2 of 2)
LMI Error Event (N2)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 3
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network
sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.
LMI Clearing Event (N3)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 1
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user
and network sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.
LMI Status Enquiry (N1)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, . . . 255
Default Setting: 6
Configures the LMI-defined N1 parameter, which sets the number of status enquiry
polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is
initiated. Applies to the user side of a UNI only.
1 – 255 – Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated
before a full status enquiry is initiated.
LMI Heartbeat (T1)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 10
Configures the LMI-defined T1 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between
the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI. Applies to the user
side of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry
messages in increments of 5.
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 15
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the
network side of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry
messages in increments of 5.
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 20
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Service Level Verification Options
SLV options are selected from the System menu (see Table 4-3).
Main Menu → Configuration → System → Service Level Verification
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options (1 of 2)
SLV Sample Interval (secs)
Possible Settings: 10 – 3600
Default Setting: 60
Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver devices. Inband
communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency, as well as transmission
success and other SLV information.
10 – 3600 – Sets the SLV Sample Interval (secs) in seconds.
SLV Delivery Ratio
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios (FDR/DDR)
between FrameSaver devices is enabled. To use this capability, both ends of all PVCs
must be FrameSaver devices. If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s,
they must be running software version 1.2 or higher.
Enable – An extra byte for FDR/DDR statistics collection is included with each frame,
which is used at the receiving end to determine the amount of data dropped by the
network.
Disable – Extra byte is not included.
DLCI Down on SLV Timeout
Available Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to
determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units.
NOTE: This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCIs connected to a far-end unit
with hardware bypass capability.
Enable – After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded,
causing the DLCI’s status to turn Inactive, an alarm and SNMP trap are generated, and
a Health and Status message created.
Disable – Missed SLV packets are monitored, but the DLCI is not declared down.
SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20
Default Setting: 3
Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be
detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared.
1–20 – Sets the limit for these error events.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-3. Service Level Verification Options (2 of 2)
SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold
Available Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 20
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the
DLCI Inactive status is cleared.
1 – 20 – Sets the limit for the clearing event.
SLV Packet Size (bytes)
Available Settings: 64 – 2048
Default Setting: 64
Sets the size of packets, in bytes, that will be used for SLV communications. SLV
packets are used to track latency and other SLV-related variables.
When the packet size is changed, a new round trip and average latency calculation
must be performed, so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance
Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred.
64 – 2048 – Sets the packet size for SLV communications.
SLV Synchronization Role
Available Settings: Tributary, Controller, None
Default Setting: Tributary
Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data
collection and storage between FrameSaver devices.
Tributary – Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and
provides network-based synchronization information to other devices in the network.
Controller – Uses its own internal time-of-day clock and provides synchronization
information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock.
NOTE: Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV
synchronization controller.
None – Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out.
This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable, or
when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring General System Options
Select General from the System menu to configure the general system
configuration options (see Table 4-4).
Main Menu → Configuration → System→ General
Table 4-4. General System Options
Test Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they
are terminated automatically. This setting does not effect DTE-commanded tests or the
LMI Packet Capture Utility feature.
Enable – All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout. This setting is recommended
when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in-band data stream. If the
FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface
providing the management access, control can be regained after the timeout expires,
terminating the test.
Disable – Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated.
Test Duration (min)
Possible Settings: 1 – 120
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the maximum duration of user-initiated tests.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable.
1 – 120 – Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes (inclusive).
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring the Physical Interfaces
Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured:
H
H
Network Interface
User Data Port
Configuring the Network Interface
When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface, select
Physical from the Network menu (see Table 4-5).
Main Menu → Configuration → Network → Physical
Table 4-5. Network Physical Interface Options
Network 1 DSL Line Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: AutoRate, 144, 272, 384, 400, 528, 768, 1168, 1552, 2320
Default Setting: AutoRate
Determines whether the rate on the DSL interface is automatically detected using the
Conexant AutoBaud algorithm, or set to a specific value.
144 – 2320 – The DSL line rate is set to the specified value.
AutoRate – The DSL line rate is automatically detected from the DSL interface.
SNR Margin Threshold (dB)
Possible Settings: –5, –4, –3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 3
Specifies the level at which a Signal to Noise Ratio margin threshold condition is
declared.
–5 – 10 – Specifies the threshold level.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring the User Data Port
Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to configure the physical
characteristics for the user data port (see Table 4-6).
Main Menu → Configuration → Data Ports → Physical
Table 4-6. Data Port Physical Interface Options (1 of 2)
Invert Transmit Clock
Possible Settings: Auto, Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Auto
Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit
DB (ITU 114) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (DCE Source) TXC is phase inverted
with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data (TD).
Auto – The port will check the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port. If
necessary, the port will automatically phase invert the clock with respect to the
transmitted data.
Enable – Phase inverts the TXC clock. Use this setting when long cable lengths
between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors.
Disable – Does not phase invert the TXC clock.
Transmit Clock Source
Possible Settings: Internal, External
Default Setting: Internal
Determines whether the DTE’s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by
its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE.
NOTE: Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit
to abort any physical port tests, including any DTE-initiated loopback tests.
Internal – The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB (ITU 114) – Transmit
Signal Element Timing (TXC) (DCE source) for timing the incoming data.
External – The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data, and the FrameSaver
unit uses the interchange circuit DA (ITU 113) – Transmit Signal Element Timing (XTXC)
(DTE source) for timing the incoming data.
Monitor RTS (Control)
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send (RTS) circuits on the user data port
will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE.
When the RTS off condition is detected, CTS is deasserted, LMI is declared down, and
no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.
Enable – Interchange circuit CA (ITU 105) – RTS is monitored to determine when valid
data communication is possible with the DTE.
Disable – RTS is not monitored. RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-6. Data Port Physical Interface Options (2 of 2)
Monitor DTR
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready (DTR) circuit on the user data port will be
used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE. When the
DTR off condition is detected, an alarm is generated, LMI is declared down, and no
further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface.
Enable – Interchange circuit CD (ITU 108/1/2) – DTR is monitored to determine when
valid data is sent from the DTE.
Disable – DTR is not monitored. DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being
transmitted, regardless of the state of the lead.
Port (DTE) Initiated Loopbacks
Possible Settings: Local, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the port’s attached
data terminal equipment using the port’s interchange lead LL (ITU 141).
Local – The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback.
Disable – The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE
Loopback.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Frame Relay for the Data Port
Select Frame Relay from the Data Ports menu to display or change the Frame
Relay options (see Table 4-7).
Main Menu → Configuration → Data Ports → Frame Relay
Table 4-7. Data Port Frame Relay Options (1 of 2)
LMI Protocol
Possible Settings: Initialize_From_Net1FR1, Initialize_From_Interface,
Auto_On_LMI_Fail, Standard, Annex-A, Annex-D
Default Setting: Initialize_From_Interface
Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery
source for the LMI protocol.
Initialize_From_Interface – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be
configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached DTE device. Once a
protocol has become active, the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered
(Standard, Annex-A or Annex-D) on the frame relay link. The protocol will not be
updated after being initially discovered. The frame relay link discovers the LMI protocol
from an attached device via LMI status polls.
Auto_On_LMI_Fail – The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured
to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device
whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs. This option is available for frame relay links
on the Port and network interfaces. The frame relay link discovers the LMI protocol from
LMI status polls by the attached DTE device.
Standard – Supports Standard LMI and the StrataCom enhancements to the
Standard LMI.
Annex-A – Supports LMI as specified by Q.933, Annex A.
Annex-D – Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1.617, Annex D.
LMI Parameters
Possible Settings: System, Custom
Default Setting: System
Allows you to use the system LMI options, or to set specific LMI options for this
interface.
System – Use system LMI options (see Table 4-2, System Frame Relay and LMI
Options).
Custom – Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters.
LMI Error Event (N2)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 3
Configures the LMI-defined N2 parameter, which sets the number of errors that can
occur on the LMI link before an error is reported. Applies to both the user and network
sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies the maximum number of errors.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-7. Data Port Frame Relay Options (2 of 2)
LMI Clearing Event (N3)
Possible Settings: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
Default Setting: 1
Configures the LMI-defined N3 parameter, which sets the number of error-free
messages that must be received before clearing an error event. Applies to both the user
and network sides of a UNI.
1 – 10 – Specifies how many error-free messages it will take to clear the error event.
LMI Inbound Heartbeat (T2)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 15
Configures the LMI-defined T2 parameter, which sets the number of seconds between
the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI. Applies to the
network side of a UNI only.
5 – 30 – Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry
messages in increments of 5.
LMI N4 Measurement Period (T3)
Possible Settings: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
Default Setting: 20
Configures the LMI-defined T3 parameter, which is the time interval (in seconds) that the
network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry
messages that have been received (N4) from the user side.
5 – 30 – Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring ATM for the Network Interface
Select ATM from the Network menu to display or change the ATM options (see
Table 4-8).
Main Menu → Configuration → Network → ATM
Table 4-8. Network ATM Options
Cell Delineation Error Event Threshold
Possible Settings: 1–1000
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the number of Out of Cell Delineation (OCD) events that must occur in a one
minute interval for a Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD) alarm to be declared.
1 – 1000 – Specifies the LCD threshold.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Circuit and DLCI Records
Circuit and DLCI records can be created and modified, and PVCs created based
on existing DLCIs, using the Network Circuit Records screen and the Data Ports
DLCI Records screen:
Main Menu → Configuration → Network → Circuit Records
Main Menu → Configuration → Data Port → DLCI Records
Table 4-9. DLCI Record Options (1 of 3)
DLCI Number
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record. The parameter determines which
DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface. DLCI
numbers range from 0 to 1023. However, the numbers 0 to15 and 1008 to 1023 are
reserved. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of
Range (16 – 1007). If the DLCI number is part of a connection, this field is read-only.
NOTES: – If a DLCI number is not entered, the DLCI record is not created.
– The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface.
– Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver
unit to abort any active frame relay tests.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).
VPI,VCI Number (VPI)
Possible Settings: 0 – 15
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the VPI. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out
of Range (0 – 15). The VPI/VCI must be unique on the ATM link.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for the user data port.
0 – 15 – Specifies the VPI.
VPI,VCI Number (VCI)
Possible Settings: 32 – 255
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the VCI. Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out
of Range (32 – 255). The VPI/VCI must be unique on the ATM link.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for the user data port.
32 – 255 – Specifies the VCI.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-9. DLCI Record Options (2 of 3)
DLCI Type
Possible Settings: Standard, Multiplexed
Default Setting: Multiplexed
Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed. This field is read-only when the
selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is
Standard.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear for the user data port, and it cannot
be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link.
Standard – Supports standard DLCIs as specified by the Frame Relay Standards. Use
this setting when a non-FrameSaver unit is at the other end.
Multiplexed – Enables multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI. Allows a
single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCIs as long as these
connections are between the same two endpoints (proprietary). Do not select
Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection.
CIR (bps)
Possible Settings: 0 – 2320000
Default Setting: 64000
Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry
without discarding frames; the CIR in bits per second. Entry of an invalid rate causes the
error message Value Out of Range (0 –x), where x = the maximum line rate
available on the port.
0 – 2320000 – Specifies the network-committed data rate.
Tc
Possible Settings: 1 – 65535
Default Setting: Read Only
Displays the DLCI’s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval (Tc) in
milliseconds. This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst
Size Bc (Bits) and CIR (bps) options.
Committed Burst Size Bc (Bits)
Possible Settings: CIR, Other
Default Setting: CIR
Specifies whether the DLCI’s committed burst size will follow the CIR, or whether it will
be entered independently. This value is the maximum amount of data that the service
provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval (Tc).
CIR – Uses the value in the CIR (bps) option as the committed burst size (Bc). The Bc
and excess burst size (Be) options are updated when a CIR update is received from the
network switch.
Other – Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLCI. When Other is
selected, the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained, as well.
Bc
Possible Settings: 0 – 2320000
Default Setting: 64000
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s committed burst size.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set
to Other.
0 – 2320000 – Specifies the DLCI’s committed burst size.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-9. DLCI Record Options (3 of 3)
Excess Burst Size (Bits)
Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the
CIR without discarding frames.
Be
Possible Settings: 0 – 2320000
Default Setting: 2256000
Allows you to display or change the DLCI’s excess burst size.
0 – 2320000 – Specifies the DLCI’s excess burst size.
DLCI Priority
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High
Default Setting: High
Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device
(also known as quality of service). All data on Port 1 is cut-through, as long as there is
no higher-priority data queued from another user port. The DLCI priority set for an
interface applies to data coming into that interface. For example, the priority set for
DLCIs on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment (such
as a router).
Display Conditions – This option is not available for the network interface.
Low – Data configured for the DLCI has low priority.
Medium – Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.
High – Data configured for the DLCI has high priority.
Outbound Management Priority
Possible Settings: Low, Medium, High
Default Setting: Medium
Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this
DLCI to the network.
Display Conditions – This option is not available on a user data port.
Low – Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority.
Medium – Management data configured for the DLCI has medium priority.
High – Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring PVC Connections
The Auto-Configuration feature automatically configures PVC connections
and their DLCI Records. PVC connections can also be created manually
(see Table 4-10).
Main Menu → Configuration → PVC Connections
From this screen, you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by
selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens. See
Configuring Management PVCs on page 4-28 for management PVC configuration
options.
Quick removal of unused DLCIs included in an existing PVC Connection, except
for HQ_Site, is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you
respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated
with the deleted PVC?prompt.
Table 4-10. PVC Connection Options (1 of 2)
Source Link
Possible Settings: Port-1, Net1-FR1
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection; the from end of a
from-to link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay
interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined that are not part of a PVC
connection or management link. For example, if Port-1 has no DLCIs defined, Port-1
would not appear as a valid setting.
Port-1 – Specifies the user data port as the source link.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface or network data port as the source link.
Clear All – Clears all Link and DLCI settings, and suppresses EDLCIs.
Source DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be defined and
cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at least
one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.
NOTE: Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.
Source EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a frame
relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a
multiplexed DLCI record number.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-10. PVC Connection Options (2 of 2)
Destination Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface used as the destination link; the to end of a from-to
link. The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that
have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or
management link. For example, if the network interface has no DLCIs defined, Net1-FR1
would not appear as a valid setting.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies the Network interface as the destination link.
Destination DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the destination DLCI for a frame relay interface. The DLCI must be defined
and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link. For multiplexed DLCIs, at
least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection.
NOTES: – Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link
contains no value.
– For the basic feature set, only one EDLCI per multiplexed DLCI may be
used in the PVC connection.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number.
Destination EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI) for a frame
relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLCI
contains a multiplexed DLCI record number.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Setting Up Management and Communication Options
The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication
menu:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Node IP Options
Management PVC Options
General SNMP Management Options
Telnet and FTP Sessions Options
SNMP NMS Security Options
SNMP Traps Options
Ethernet Port Options
Communication Port Options
External Modem (COM Port) Options
Configuring Node IP Information
Select Node IP to display, add, or change the information necessary to support
general IP communications for the node (see Table 4-11). When deploying units
to remote sites, minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication → Node IP
This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting (TS) Management
Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their
networks. This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link.
Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations.
No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the
customer.
TS_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models, but the link can be
enabled at any time. Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard
DLCI can be used. When enabled, a troubleshooting link can be accessed any
time the service provider requests access. An assigned security level can also
control access.
When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link, the
link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry
screen with the Note: This PVC has been designated as the TS
Access Management Linkmessage.
NOTE:
The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already
set up (e.g., 980).
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-11. Node IP Options (1 of 3)
Node IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address needed to access the node. Since an IP address is not bound
to a particular port, it can be used for remote access via a management PVC.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the node, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node IP address with zeros.
Node Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the
node. Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port, it can be used for remote
access via a management PVC.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the node, which can
be viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the node subnet mask with zeros. When the node’s subnet mask is
all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the
IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or Class C:
255.255.255.000.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-11. Node IP Options (2 of 3)
Default IP Destination
Possible Settings: None, COM, Ethernet, PVCname
Default Setting: None
Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route.
Examples:
H If the default IP network is connected to the communications port, select COM.
H If the default IP network is connected to a far-end device over the management PVC
named London for the remote device located in the London office, select the PVC
name London (as defined by the Name configuration option, Table 4-12,
Management PVCs Options).
NOTE: If the link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes
disabled or down, the unrouteable data will be discarded. Make sure that
the link selected is operational, and if that link goes down, change the
default destination.
CAUTION: Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a
subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS, router, LAN
adapter, terminal server, etc. is connected. Communicating with an
unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops,
which will last 16 iterations times the retry count.
None – No default network destination is specified. Unrouteable data will be discarded.
This is the recommended setting.
COM – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port. Only
appears when Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 4-18, Communication Port
Options).
Ethernet – Specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port. Only
appears when the Ethernet port’s Interface Status option is enabled. When selected, the
Default Gateway Address must also be configured (see Table 4-17, Ethernet Port
Options).
PVCname – Specifies a name for the management PVC. Only appears when a
management PVC name is defined for the node. For example, when the network is
connected to a remote device located in the London office, London can be specified as
the PVC name, which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located
in London. London would appear as one of the available selections.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-11. Node IP Options (3 of 3)
TS Access Management Link
Available Settings: None, PVCname
Default Setting: None
Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service
providers.
If the setting is changed from the management PVC name to None, the Delete the
Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI|Circuit Record?
prompt appears. If you select:
H No – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None.
H Yes – The link designation is removed and the option is set to None, and the link
and its DLCI and/or VPI,VCI will be deleted.
None – Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link.
PVCname – Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC.
Display Conditions – This selection only appears when a dedicated management
PVC has been defined on the network frame relay or ATM link.
TS Management Link Access Level
Available Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP
session when the service provider is using the TS Access Management Link.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when TS Access Management Link is
set to None.
NOTES: – Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access
level set by the Session Access Level, Login Required, or FTP Login
Required option settings (see Table 4-14, Telnet and FTP Session
Options).
– Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session,
Inactivity Timeout, Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings.
Level-1 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability
to view unit information, change configuration options, and run tests. This is the highest
access level allowed. Use this setting when downloading files.
Level-2 – Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability
to view unit information and run tests only; they cannot change configuration options.
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view
unit information only; they cannot change configuration options or run tests.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Management PVCs
Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or
changing Management PVCs (see Table 4-12). First, DLCI records must have
been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside. See
Configuring Circuit and DLCI Records for additional information.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Management PVCs
Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs.
H
H
When you select New, the configuration option field is blank.
When you select Modify, the values displayed for all fields are based on the
PVC ID number that you specified.
These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a
TS Management Link (see Configuring Node IP Information for additional
information).
From this screen, you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting
the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens.
Select the Delete function key, a Management PVC ID#, and respond Yes to the
Remove otherwise unused components associated with the
deleted PVC?prompt for quick removal of unused DLCIs. If the Management
PVC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination, a Default IP
Destination, or a TS Access Management Link, an ... Are You Sure?prompt
appears to warn you.
To configure these options, Service Type on the Easy Install screen must be set
to Frame Relay.
Table 4-12. Management PVC Options (1 of 3)
Name
Possible Settings: ASCII Text Entry
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens
(e.g., Tampa for the Tampa, Florida office).
ASCII Text Entry – Enter a unique name for the management PVC (maximum length
8 characters).
Intf IP Address
Possible Settings: Node-IP-Address, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
Default Setting: Node-IP-Address
Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC, providing
connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network.
Node-IP-Address – Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address (see
Table 4-11, Node IP Options).
Special (001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255) – Allows you to display/edit an IP
address for the unit’s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is
different from the node’s IP address.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-12. Management PVC Options (2 of 3)
Intf Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: Node-Subnet-Mask, Calculate, Special (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn)
Default Setting: Node-Subnet-Mask
Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the
unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network
(through frame relay) that requires a specific subnet mask for the interface.
Node-Subnet-Mask – Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node-Subnet
Mask configuration option (see Table 4-11, Node IP Options).
Calculate – Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class
of the IP address (Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000, or
Class C: 255.255.255.000). Cannot be displayed or edited.
Special (000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255) – Allows you to edit/display the subnet
mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface. A
text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit’s management
PVC.
Set DE
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether frames (packets) sent on a management PVC have the Discard
Eligible (DE) bit set. This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard
first during periods of network congestion. This allows management traffic to be viewed
as lower priority than customer data.
Enable – Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC.
Disable – Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC. This is
the recommended setting, particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service.
Primary Link
Possible Settings: Net1-FR1, Port-1, Clear
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC. The interface
selected must have at least one DLCI (or DLCI with EDLCI) defined, which is not part of
a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC.
Net1-FR1 – Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection.
Port-1 – Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the
connection.
Clear – Clears the link and the DLCI field, and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI
was multiplexed.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-12. Management PVC Options (3 of 3)
Primary DLCI
Possible Settings: 16 – 1007
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay
interface is selected.
The DLCI must be defined for the link (i.e., has a DLCI record), and it must not be part
of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC. For multiplexed
DLCIs, at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI.
NOTES: – DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank.
– Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI.
16 – 1007 – Specifies the DLCI number (inclusive).
Primary EDLCI
Possible Settings: 0 – 62
Default Setting: Initially blank; no default.
Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is
selected. EDLCIs identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCIs that are
unique to those DLCIs.
Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI.
Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI. Use 1 – 62 to identify secondary EDLCIs. Use the
primary EDLCI for customer data, which has a higher utilization rate than management
data, with slightly less line overhead.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference
a multiplexed DLCI.
NOTE: Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI
field.
0 – 62 – Specifies the EDLCI number (inclusive).
Primary Link RIP
Possible Settings: None, Proprietary, Standard_out
Default Setting:
For multiplexed DLCIs: Proprietary
For nonmultiplexed DLCIs: Standard_out
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment.
None – Does not use a routing protocol.
Proprietary – Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing
information between FrameSaver units. A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of
the link. This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed
DLCIs (see Table 4-9, DLCI Record Options).
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing
information only about FrameSaver units in the network. This is the factory default for
management PVCs configured on standard DLCIs.
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the
FrameSaver unit for the management interface (e.g., Cisco: config-t,
router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive version 1,
ctl-z WR). See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring General SNMP Management
Select General SNMP Management to add, change, or delete the information
needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the
NMS supporting the SNMP protocols (see Table 4-13).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
General SNMP Management
You must have Level-1 access to display or configure these options.
Table 4-13. General SNMP Management Options (1 of 2)
SNMP Management
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an
SNMP-compatible NMS.
Enable – Can be managed as an SNMP agent.
Disable – Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent. The FrameSaver unit will not
respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps.
Community Name 1
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Public in ASCII text field
Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 1 (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Clears Community Name 1.
Name 1 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read/Write
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).
Community Name 2
Possible Settings: ASCII text entry, Clear
Default Setting: Clear
Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the
FrameSaver unit’s MIB. The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP
manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB.
ASCII text entry – Adds to or changes Community Name 2 (maximum 255 characters).
Clear – Clears Community Name 2.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-13. General SNMP Management Options (2 of 2)
Name 2 Access
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB. This is the type of access
allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command). This includes all objects
specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP get and set commands).
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support
Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP (File Transport Protocol)
session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security
applicable to the session. Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time
(see Table 4-14).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Telnet and FTP Session
When a TS Management Link has been set up and activated, the following
options have no effect upon the PVC:
H
H
H
Telnet Login Required
Session Access Level
FTP Login Required
Table 4-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (1 of 3)
Telnet Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet
client on an interconnected IP network.
Enable – Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client.
Disable – Does not allow Telnet sessions.
Telnet Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) are required to
access the menu-driven user interface via a Telnet session. If required, the login used is
the same login used for an menu-driven user interface session. This option does not
affect the TS Access Management Link.
Enable – Requires a login to access a Telnet session.
Disable – Does not require a login.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (2 of 3)
Session Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu-driven user
interface via a Telnet session. If a login is required for the session, the effective access
level is also determined by the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the
effective access level is determined by this option. This option does not affect the TS
Access Management Link.
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the
session or the user. For example, if the assigned Session Access Level is
Level-2, but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access is
allowed for the session.
Level-1 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information, change configuration options, and run tests.
This is the highest access level allowed.
CAUTION: Before changing the session access level to Level-2 or 3, make sure that
the COM port’s Port Access Level is set to Level-1 and that at least one
Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this occurs,
you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the
configuration process again. A reset is required if the Communication
Port’s Port Use option is set to Net Link (see Table 4-4, General System
Options).
Level-2 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information and run tests only; they cannot change
configuration options.
Level-3 – Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1, 2, and 3, with
the capability to view system information only; they cannot change configuration options
or run tests.
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of
keyboard inactivity.
Enable – Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires.
Disable – Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 10
Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is
disconnected.
Display Conditions – This option does not appear when Inactivity Timeout is disabled.
1 – 60 – Up to an hour can be set.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-14. Telnet and FTP Session Options (3 of 3)
FTP Session
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP (file transfer
protocol) client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session. This option
must be enabled when downloading files.
Enable – Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client.
Disable – Does not allow FTP sessions.
FTP Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session. If required,
the login used is the same login used for a menu-driven user interface session. This
option does not affect the TS Access Management Link.
Enable – User is prompted for a login ID and password.
Disable – No login is required for an FTP session.
FTP Max Transfer Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 1 – 2320
Default Setting: 2320
Sets the maximum receive rate of file transfer to the system via management PVCs.
This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected
bandwidth without interfering with normal operation. Using this option, new software and
configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings, or at a slower
rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed. Based upon TCP flow
control, the FTP server in the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting.
1 – 2320 – Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum
management speed.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring SNMP NMS Security
Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to
display, add, or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver
unit to set up trap managers (see Table 4-15).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
SNMP NMS Security
A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by
IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP.
Table 4-15. SNMP NMS Security Options
NMS IP Validation
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to access the node. Only allows access when the
sending manager’s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen.
Enable – Performs security checks.
Disable – Does not perform security checks.
Number of Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 10
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send
SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit. An IP address must be configured for each
management system allowed to send messages. Configure IP addresses in the NMS n
IP Address configuration option.
1 – 10 – Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers.
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP
messages to the unit. If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and
its IP address cannot be matched here, access is denied and an authenticationFailure
trap is generated. If a match is found, the type of access (read-only or read/write) is
determined by the corresponding Access Type.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the NMS IP address.
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.
Access Type
Possible Settings: Read, Read/Write
Default Setting: Read
Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation
is performed.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
Read – Allows read-only access (SNMP Get command) to the MIB objects. This
includes all objects specified as either read-only or read/write in the MIB RFCs.
Read/Write – Allows read and write access (SNMP Get and Set commands) to the MIB
objects. However, access for all read-only objects is specified as read-only.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring SNMP Traps
Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to
configure SNMP traps when a trap is generated (see Table 4-16).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
SNMP Traps
See Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults, for trap
format standards and special trap features, including RMON-specific traps, and
the default settings that will generate RMON-specific SNMP traps.
Table 4-16. SNMP Traps Options (1 of 3)
SNMP Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently
configured SNMP trap manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages.
Disable – Does not send trap messages.
Number of Trap Managers
Possible Settings: 1 – 6
Default Setting: 1
Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap
messages from the FrameSaver unit. An NMS IP Address must be configured in the
NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap
messages.
1 – 6 – Specifies the number of trap managers (inclusive).
NMS n IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager(s) to receive SNMP traps.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap
manager.
Clear – Fills the NMS IP address with zeros.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-16. SNMP Traps Options (2 of 3)
Initial Route Destination
Possible Settings: AutoRoute, Ethernet, COM, PVCname
Default Setting: AutoRoute
Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager. When proprietary
RIP is active, only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management
link as the initial destination. All other units can use the default setting.
Display Conditions – This option appears for each trap manager specified in the
Number of Trap Managers configuration option.
AutoRoute – Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route
for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager, or the Default IP Destination when no
route is available in the routing table (see Table 4-11, Node IP Options).
Ethernet – Uses the Ethernet port. Only appears when the Ethernet port’s Interface
Status option is enabled (see Table 4-17, Ethernet Port Options).
COM – Uses the COM port. Only available when Port Use is set to Net Link (see
Table 4-18, Communication Port Options).
PVCname – Uses the defined management linkname (the name given the Management
PVC). Only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node.
General Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Warm, AuthFail, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and/or authenticationFailure
events are sent to the currently configured trap manager(s).
Disable – Does not send trap messages for these events.
Warm – Sends trap messages for warmStart events only.
AuthFail – Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only.
Both – Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events.
Enterprise Specific Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the
currently configured trap manager(s).
Enable – Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
Disable – Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-16. SNMP Traps Options (3 of 3)
Link Traps
Possible Settings: Disable, Up, Down, Both
Default Setting: Both
Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured
trap manager(s). A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of
the interfaces. A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces
is active.
Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to
specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages.
Disable – Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages.
Up – Sends trap messages for linkUp events only.
Down – Sends trap messages for linkDown events only.
Both – Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events.
Link Traps Interfaces
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, All
Default Setting: All
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific trap
messages. These traps are not supported on the COM port.
Network – Generates these trap messages on the network interface only.
Ports – Generates these trap messages for linkUp, linkDown, and enterpriseSpecific
events on the user data port only.
All – Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all
interfaces, except for the COM port, that are applicable to the FrameSaver model.
DLCI Traps on Interfaces
Possible Settings: Network, Ports, All, None
Default Setting: All
Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for
individual DLCIs. These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces.
Network – Generates these trap messages on DLCIs for the network interface only.
Ports – Generates these trap messages for DLCIs on a user data port only.
All – Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces.
None – No DLCI trap messages are generated.
RMON Traps
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap
manager(s). RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups
of RMON1 when a selected variable’s configured threshold is exceeded.
Display Conditions – This option only appears for units with the SLV feature set.
Enable – Sends RMON trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded.
Disable – Does not send RMON trap messages.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring the Ethernet Port
Select Ethernet Port from the Management and Communication menu to
configure the Ethernet port (see Table 4-17).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Ethernet Port
Table 4-17. Ethernet Port Options (1 of 2)
Interface Status
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether the Ethernet port is being used and can be configured.
Enable – The port is active. It can receive Version 2 or IEEE 802.3 MAC frames, or
transmit Version 2 MAC frames only.
Disable – The port is not active. When the port is disabled, the following will occur:
H No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated.
H All port uses that refer to the Ethernet port, like the Default IP Destination and
Initial Route Destination, will be reset to their default values (see Table 4-11, Node
IP Options, and Table 4-16, SNMP Trap Options).
IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address needed to access the Ethernet port.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the port, which can be
viewed or edited.
Clear – Fills the IP address with zeros.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the
Ethernet port.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Set the Ethernet port’s subnet mask. The range
for each byte is 000 to 255.
Clear – Fills the subnet mask associated with the IP address with zeros.
Default Gateway Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies the IP address for the port’s default gateway. It is used for packets that do not
have a route.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the port, which can be
viewed or edited (i.e., a router on the LAN).
Clear – Fills the default gateway’s IP address with zeros.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-17. Ethernet Port Options (2 of 2)
Proxy ARP
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether the port can be used to supply the MAC (Media Access Control)
address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of a PVC using ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol). This technique is used for communication between devices on
different networks but on the same subnet. Using this technique, the Default Gateway
Address is provided when there is an ARP request, and when data is sent to the
gateway, the gateway forwards the data to the appropriate device. The gateway acts as
an agent for the destination device.
Enable – Proxy ARP is enabled on the port.
Disable – The port cannot be used to acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at
the other end of the PVC
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring the Communication Port
Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to
display or change the communication port configuration options (see Table 4-18).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Communication Port
Table 4-18. Communication Port Options (1 of 4)
Port Use
Possible Settings: Terminal, Net Link
Default Setting: Terminal
Assigns a specific use to the COM port.
NOTE: If the Default IP Destination is set to COM (see Table 4-11, Node IP
Options) and you change Port Use to Terminal, the Default IP Destination
is forced to None.
Terminal – The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection.
Net Link – The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or
IP device port.
Data Rate (Kbps)
Possible Settings: 9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Default Setting: 19.2
Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second.
9.6 – 115.2 kbps – Sets the communication port speed.
Character Length
Possible Settings: 7, 8
Default Setting: 8
Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character.
NOTE: Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to
Net Link.
7 – Sets the character length to seven bits.
8 – Sets the character length to eight bits. Use this setting if using the COM port as the
network communication link.
Parity
Possible Settings: None, Even, Odd
Default Setting: None
Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port. A
parity bit is added to the data to make the “1” bits of each character add up to either an
odd or even number. Each character of transmitted data is approved as error-free if the
“1” bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option.
None – Provides no parity.
Even – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even.
Odd – Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Communication Port Options (2 of 4)
Stop Bits
Possible Settings: 1, 2
Default Setting: 1
Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port.
1 – Provides one stop bit.
2 – Provides two stop bits.
Ignore Control Leads
Possible Settings: Disable, DTR
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies whether DTR is used.
Disable – Treats control leads as standard operation.
DTR – Ignores DTR. This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices.
Login Required
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Disable
Determines whether a user ID and password (referred to as the login) is required in
order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Requires a login to access the menu-driven user interface.
Disable – Does not requires a login.
Port Access Level
Possible Settings: Level-1, Level-2, Level-3
Default Setting: Level-1
Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the
COM port. If a login is required for the port, the effective access level is determined by
the user’s access level. When a login is not required, the effective access level is
determined by this option.
NOTE: The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the
port or the user. For example, if the Port Access Level assigned is Level-2,
but the User Access Level is Level-3, then only level-3 access will be
permitted for the port.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Level-1 – Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring, diagnostics,
and configuration. The user can add, change, and display configuration options, and
perform device testing.
CAUTION: Before changing the communication port’s access level to Level-2 or 3,
make sure that the Telnet Session Access Level is set top Level-1 and at
least one Login ID is set to Level-1. Otherwise, access will be lost. If this
occurs, you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the
configuration process again.
Level-2 – Allows limited access and control of the device. The user can monitor and
perform diagnostics, display status and configuration option information.
Level-3 – Allows limited access with monitoring control only. The user can monitor and
display status and configuration screens only.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Communication Port Options (3 of 4)
Inactivity Timeout
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity
(no keyboard activity).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
Enable – Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity.
Disable – Does not disconnect user session.
Disconnect Time (Minutes)
Possible Settings: 1 – 60
Default Setting: 10
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is
disconnected.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal.
1 – 60 – Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes (inclusive).
IP Address
Possible Settings: 001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: Clear (000.000.000.000)
Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port. Only in effect
when the COM port is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is
set to Net Link).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255 – Shows the IP address for the COM port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When
the IP Address is all zeros, the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been
configured.
Subnet Mask
Possible Settings: 000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255, Clear
Default Setting: 000.000.000.000
Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit. Only in effect when the COM port
is configured as a network communication link (Port Use option is set to Net Link).
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
000.000.000.000 – 255.255.255.255 – Shows the subnet mask for the COM port, which
you can view or edit.
Clear – Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros. When
the node subnet mask is all zeros, the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based
upon the class of the IP address: Class A: 255.000.000.000, Class B: 255.255.000.000,
or Class C: 255.255.255.000.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Table 4-18. Communication Port Options (4 of 4)
RIP
Possible Settings: None, Standard_out
Default Setting: None
Specifies which Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is used to enable routing of
management data between devices.
Display Conditions – This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link.
None – No routing is used.
Standard_out – The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing
information about other FrameSaver units in the network. Standard RIP messages
received on this link are ignored.
NOTE: The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the
COM port, configured as the management interface (e.g., Cisco:
config-t, router RIP, int serialx, IP RIP Receive
version 1, ctl-z WR).
To create this management interface, make sure that Node or COM port IP
Information has been set up (Configuring Node IP Information).
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Options
Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem
Select External Modem (Com Port) to display or change the configuration options
that control call processing for an external device attached to the COM port
(see Table 4-19).
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
External Modem (Com Port)
NOTE:
A standard EIA-232 crossover cable is required when connecting an external
modem to the FrameSaver unit’s COM port. See Standard EIA-232-D
Crossover Cable in Appendix C, Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments,
for cable pin assignments.
Table 4-19. External Modem (COM Port) Options
External Modem Commands
Possible Settings: Disable, AT
Default Setting: Disable
Specifies the type of commands to be sent over the COM port.
Disable – Commands will not be sent over the COM port.
AT – Standard Attention (AT) Commands are sent over the COM port to control the
external device. All AT command strings will end with a carriage return (hex 0x0D) and a
line feed (hex 0x0A).
CAUTION: Do not use this setting if you have an asynchronous terminal connected
to the COM port.
Dial-In Access
Possible Settings: Enable, Disable
Default Setting: Enable
Controls whether external devices can dial-in to the FrameSaver unit through the COM
port (based on the Port Use option setting).
Display Conditions – This option does not appear if External Modem Commands is
disabled.
Enable – Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or
IP network.
Disable – Does not answer incoming calls.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
5
This chapter includes the following:
H
H
H
H
Limiting Access
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access
Controlling External COM Port Device Access
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access
— Limiting Telnet Access
— Limiting FTP Access
— Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link
Controlling SNMP Access
H
— Disabling SNMP Access
— Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels
— Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses
Creating a Login
H
H
H
Modifying a Login
Deleting a Login
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Limiting Access
The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces:
H
H
H
H
Asynchronous (async) terminal
Telnet
FTP
SNMP
Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time; that is, you
can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions, or one Telnet session and one active
asynchronous terminal session, or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal
sessions.
Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access
Direct asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface can be
limited by:
H
H
Requiring a login.
Assigning an access level to the port or interface.
See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for
more information about communication (COM) port configuration options.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
" Procedure
To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu-driven user interface:
1. Select the Communication Port options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Communication Port
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE: User ID and password combinations
must be defined. See Creating a Login.
Limit the effective access level to
Level-3 or Level-2
Port Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher
than the access level specified for the port
(e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2
port access has been set, the Level-1 user
can only operate as a Level-2 user).
If you are going to allow Level-1 users to
configure the unit, keep the access at Level-1.
NOTE:
See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8,
Troubleshooting, should you be locked out inadvertently.
3. Save your changes.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Controlling External COM Port Device Access
Dial-in access can be controlled when an external device (modem) is connected
to the unit’s communication (COM) port. The External Device Commands option
must be set to AT.
" Procedure
To control dial-in access:
1. Select the External Modem options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
External Modem (Com Port)
2. Enable the Dial-In Access configuration option.
This option only appears when the External Device Commands option is set
to AT.
3. Save your change.
See Configuring the COM Port to Support an External Modem in Chapter 4,
Configuration Options, for more information about external device communication
port configuration options.
Controlling Telnet or FTP Access
The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or
FTP session. Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on
a service provider’s troubleshooting (TS) management link.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Limiting Telnet Access
Telnet access can be limited by:
H
H
Disabling Telnet access completely.
Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Management
Link.
H
H
Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions.
Disabling TS Management Link access.
To limit Telnet access via a service provider’s troubleshooting management link,
see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link.
" Procedure
To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Telnet Session to Disable.
Disable Telnet access
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE: User ID and password combinations
must be defined. See Creating a Login.
Assign an access level
Session Access Level to Level-2 or Level-3.
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher
than the access level specified for the Telnet
session (e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and
Level-2 telnet access has been set, the
Level-1 user can only operate as a Level-2
user).
If you are going to allow users to configure the
unit, keep the access at Level-1.
3. Save your changes.
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4, Configuration
Options, for more information about setting Telnet configuration options.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Limiting FTP Access
FTP access can be limited by:
H
H
H
Disabling FTP access completely.
Requiring a user ID and password to login.
Limiting FTP bandwidth.
" Procedure
To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Management Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
FTP Session to Disable.
Disable FTP
Require a login
Login Required to Enable.
NOTE: User ID and password combinations
must be defined. See Creating a Login.
If you want to allow users to configure the unit
or perform file transfers, including downloads,
keep the access at Level-1.
Level-1 access is required to download
software to the unit, or to upload or download
configuration files. Level-3 is sufficient for
NMS access for SLV historical information.
Limit bandwidth for FTP
FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the
network line speed, typically less than or
equal to the CIR.
This method is not recommended if SLV
reports are desired since FTP is required to
generate the reports.
3. Save your changes.
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support in Chapter 4, Configuration
Options, for more information about setting FTP configuration options.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Management Link
" Procedure
To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Management Link:
1. Select the Telnet and FTP Session options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Telnet and FTP Sessions
2. Disable Telnet Session and/or FTP Session, as appropriate.
3. Return to the Management and Communication menu, and select Node IP.
4. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Disable access via a
TS Management Link
TS Management Link to None.
Assign an access level to the
TS Management Link
TS Management Access Level to Level-2
or Level-3.
NOTE: Regardless of a user’s login access
level, a user cannot operate at a level higher
than the access level specified for the session
(e.g., if a user has a Level-1 login and Level-2
telnet access has been set, the Level-1 user
can only operate as a Level-2 user).
If you are going to allow users to configure the
unit, keep the access at Level-1.
5. Save your changes.
See Configuring Telnet and/or FTP Session Support or Configuring Node IP
Information in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for more information about these
configuration options.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Controlling SNMP Access
The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1, which provides limited security
through the use of community names. There are three methods for limiting SNMP
access:
H
H
H
Disabling SNMP access.
Assigning SNMP community names and the access type.
Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit.
Disabling SNMP Access
When the SNMP access is disabled, the FrameSaver unit will not respond to
SNMP messages.
" Procedure
To disable SNMP access:
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
General SNMP Management
2. Disable the SNMP Management option.
3. Save your change.
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration
Options, for more information about General SNMP Management configuration
options.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an
SNMP manager. SNMP manager access can be limited by:
H
H
Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the
FrameSaver unit’s Management Information Base (MIB).
Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name.
Whenever an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB, the
community name must be supplied.
" Procedure
To assign SNMP community names and access types:
1. Select the General SNMP Management options.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
General SNMP Management
2. Set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Assign SNMP community names
Community Name 1 and Community Name 2
to a community name text, up to 255
characters in length.
Assign the type of access allowed
for the SNMP community names
Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read
or Read/Write.
3. Save your changes.
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration
Options, for more information about General SNMP Management configuration
options.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses
An additional level of security is provided by:
H
H
Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit.
Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management
systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit.
H
Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address
validation is performed.
The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that
determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP
management systems attempting to communicate with the unit.
Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable.
Menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
General SNMP Management → SNMP Management: Enable
See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 4, Configuration
Options, for more information about SNMP management configuration options.
" Procedure
To limit SNMP access through IP addresses:
1. Select the SNMP NMS Security options:
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
SNMP NMS Security
2. Select and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
To . . .
Set the configuration option . . .
Enable IP address checking
NMS IP Validation to Enable.
Specify the number (between 1
and 10) of SNMP management
systems that are authorized to
send SNMP messages to the
FrameSaver unit
Number of Managers to the desired
number.
Specify the IP address(es) that
identifies the SNMP manager(s)
authorized to send SNMP
messages to the unit
NMS n IP Address to the appropriate
IP address.
Specify the access allowed for an
authorized NMS when IP address
validates is performed
Access Level to Read or Read/Write.
3. Save your changes.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for
more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options.
Creating a Login
A login is required if security is enabled. (Security is enabled by the configuration
options Login Required for the communication port, modem port, and Telnet
Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session.) Up to six
login ID/password combinations can be created using ASCII text, and each login
must have a specified access level. Logins must be unique and they are
case-sensitive.
" Procedure
To create a login record:
1. Select Administer Logins.
Main Menu → Control → Administer Logins
2. Select New, and set the following configuration options, as appropriate.
In the field . . .
Login ID
Enter the . . .
ID of 1 to 10 characters.
Password from 1 to 10 characters.
Password
Re-enter password
Password again to verify that you entered the
correct password into the device.
Access Level
Access level: 1, 2, or 3.
H Level-1 – User can add, change, and
display configuration options, save, and
perform device testing.
H Level-2 – User can monitor and perform
diagnostics, display status and
configuration option information.
H Level-3 – User can only monitor and
display status and configuration screens.
CAUTION: Make sure at least one login is set
up for Level-1 access or you may be
inadvertently locked out.
NOTE:
See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 8,
Troubleshooting, should you be locked out inadvertently.
3. Save your changes.
When Save is complete, the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field, ready
for another entry.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security and Logins
See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for
more information about security configuration options.
Modifying a Login
Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one.
Deleting a Login
" Procedure
To delete a login record:
1. Select Administer Logins.
Main Menu → Control → Administer Logins
2. Page through login pages/records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys
until the login to be deleted is displayed.
3. Select Delete.
4. Save your deletion.
When the deletion is complete, the number of login pages/records reflects
one less record, and the record before the deleted record reappears.
Example:
Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
6
This chapter includes the following information:
H
H
Displaying System Information
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads
— LED Descriptions
— Control Lead Descriptions
H
H
H
Device Messages
Status Information
System and Test Status Messages
— Self-Test Results Messages
— Last System Reset Date and Time
— Health and Status Messages
— Test Status Messages
PVC Connection Status
H
H
H
H
Network Interface Status
IP Routing Table
Performance Statistics
— Clearing Performance Statistics
— Service Level Verification Performance Statistics
— DLCI Performance Statistics
— Frame Relay Performance Statistics
— ATM Performance Statistics
— Ethernet Performance Statistics
H
Trap Event Log
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Displaying System Information
Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver
unit. This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement
units and/or making firmware upgrades.
Main Menu → Status → Identity
View this field . . .
To find the . . .
System Name
Domain name for this SNMP-managed node (up to
255 ASCII characters).
System Contact
System Location
NAM
Contact person for this SNMP-managed node.
Physical location for this SNMP-managed node.
NAM Type
Type of Network Access Module (NAM) installed (DSL
FR-ATM NAM). This card type is supported by the SNMP
SysDescr Object.
Serial Number
Unit’s 7-character serial number.
Ethernet MAC Address
Media Access Control (MAC) address assigned to the
Ethernet port during manufacturing.
Hardware Revision
Unit’s hardware version. Format nnnn-nnx consists of a
4-digit number, followed by two digits and one alphabetic
character.
Current Software Revision
Software version currently being used by the unit.
Format nn.nn.nn consists of a 6-digit number that
represents the major and minor revision levels.
Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit,
but has not yet been implemented. Format is the same as
for the Current Software Revision.
H In Progressindicates that the flash memory is
currently being downloaded.
H Invalidindicates that no download has occurred or
the download was not successful
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads
The FrameSaver DSL unit’s faceplate includes LEDs (light-emitting diodes) that
provide status on the unit and its interfaces.
The central site unit (supporting 64 PVCs) is shown.
9783-C
M
ALM
AT
OK
TEST
DSL
OK
T®M
FrameSaver SDLSVL
System
Network
Port
00-16769
The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen allows you to monitor a remote unit
and is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems. The appropriate
interfaces are shown on this screen, with the active status highlighted.
Main Menu → Status → Display LEDs and Control Leads
Display LEDs & Control Leads Screen
main/status/leds
9783-C
Device Name: Node A
05/13/2000 06:01
DISPLAY LEDS & CONTROL LEADS
DSL FR-ATM NAM
GENERAL
OK
Alarm
Test
NETWORK1
Data Mode
LOS
Training
LCD
PORT-1
OK
TXD
RXD
DTR
RTS
ATM Mode
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh
Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions. LED and control lead
descriptions are in the sections that follow.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
LED Descriptions
The following table identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light. See
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3 for network and user data port interface LED information.
Table 6-1. General Status LEDs (1 of 1)
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Power and
Operational
Status
Green
ON – FrameSaver unit has power and it is
operational.
OFF – FrameSaver unit is in a power-on
self-test, or there is a failure.
ALM
Operational
Alarm (Fail)
Red
ON – FrameSaver unit has just been reset,
or an error or fault has been detected.
OFF – No failures have been detected.
See Health and Status Messages for additional
information about alarms.
TEST
Test Mode
Yellow
ON – Loopback or test pattern is in progress,
initiated locally, remotely, or from the
network.
OFF – No tests are active.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-2. Network Interface LEDs
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
ATM
ATM Link Status Multi-
colored
Yellow – The ATM link is down.
Green – The ATM link is up.
OFF – The FrameSaver unit is in leased line
mode.
DSL
DSL Status
Green
ON – The DSL link is in data mode and
functioning normally.
OFF – The DSL link is down.
Flashing – The DSL link is training.
Table 6-3. User Data Port LED
Label
Indication
Color
What It Means
OK
Operational
Status
Green
ON – The interchange circuits for the port
are in the correct state to transmit and
receive data.
OFF – The port is idle. Occurs if the port is
disabled, or if the port is configured to
monitor DTR and/or RTS and the
lead(s) is not asserted.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Control Lead Descriptions
In addition to the LEDs, certain control leads can be monitored through the
Display LEDs and Control Leads screen. They are described in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4. Additional Control Leads
Label
Indication
What It Means
Network Interface
Data
Mode
Data Mode Active
The unit has trained up and is operating in
normal data mode. The front panel DSL LED is
on.
LOS
Loss Of Signal
A Loss Of Signal condition has been detected
on the network.
Training
LCD
Training in Progress
Loss of Cell Delineation
The unit is training. The front panel DSL LED is
flashing.
A Loss of Cell Delineation alarm condition has
been detected. The front panel ATM LED is
yellow.
User Data Port
TXD
RXD
DTR
Transmit Data
Data is being sent to the far end device.
Receive Data
Data is being received from the far end device.
Data Terminal Ready
The Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) is not
ready to operate.
RTS
Request to Send
The DTE has indicated that it is ready to
transmit data.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Device Messages
These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens.
All device messages are listed in alphabetical order.
Table 6-5. Device Messages (1 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Access level is n,
Read-only.
User’s access level is 2
or 3; user is not authorized
to change configurations.
No action is needed.
Already Active
Test selected is already
running.
H Allow test to continue.
H Select another test.
H Stop the test.
Blank Entries
Removed
New had been selected
from the Administer Logins
screen, no entry was made,
then Save was selected.
H No action is needed.
H Reenter the Login ID,
Password, and Access Level.
Cannot delete Trap
Manager
Delete was selected from
the Management PVCs
Options screen, but the
PVC had been defined as a
trap destination.
No action needed, or configure
another path for traps and try
again.
Cannot Save – no
Level 1 Login IDs
Security was being set up,
but all the logins were
assigned either Level-2 or
Level-3 access.
Set up at least one login with
Access Level-1 so the unit can
be configured.
Command Complete
Configuration has been
saved or all tests have
been aborted.
No action is needed.
Wait and try again.
Connection Refused
Two menu-driven user
interface sessions are
already in use when a
Telnet session was
attempted.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
Destination Not
Unique
Destination entered is
already being used.
Enter another destination
indicator.
DLCI in connection.
Delete connection first that was part of a
User tried to delete a DLCI
H No action needed, or
H Delete the connection, then
connection.
delete the DLCI.
DLCI Number Already The DLCI number entered
Enter another DLCI number.
Exists
on the DLCI Record Entry
screen has already been
created so is not unique.
DLCI Number
Reserved
User tried to designate a
special troubleshooting
DLCI.
No action is needed.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-5. Device Messages (2 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Duplicate DLCI
Number
DLCI number entered is not No action is needed; previous
unique for the frame relay
contents of the DLCI number
field is restored.
link.
File Transfer Complete A file transfer was
Switch to the newly downloaded
software.
performed successfully.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
See Changing Software in
Chapter 7, FTP Operation.
File Transfer Failed –
Invalid file
A file transfer was
attempted, but it was not
successful.
H Try again, making sure you
type the filename correctly.
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
H Exit the FTP session, or
download another file.
See Changing Software in
Chapter 7, FTP Operation.
Invalid Character (x)
A non-valid printable ASCII Reenter information using valid
character has been
characters.
entered.
Invalid date: must be
mm/dd/yyyy
A non-valid date was
entered on the System
Information screen.
Reenter the date in the
month/day/4-digit year format.
Invalid date and/or
time
A non-valid date or time
was entered on the System month/day/4-digit year format
Information screen. The
date does not exist (e.g.,
February 30th).
Reenter the date in the
and/or time in the
hour:minutes:seconds format.
Invalid time: must be
hh:mm:ss
A non-valid system time
was entered on the System hour:minutes:seconds format.
Information screen.
Reenter the time in the
Invalid – Already
Active
A test was already in
progress when it was
selected.
No action is needed.
Invalid Password
Login is required and an
incorrect password was
entered; access is denied.
H Try again.
H Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
Invalid Test
Combination
A conflicting loopback or
pattern test was in progress
when Start was selected to
start another test, or was
active on the same or
H Wait until other test ends and
message clears.
H Cancel all tests from the Test
screen (Path: main/test).
another interface when
Start was selected.
H Stop the test from the same
screen the test was started
from.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-5. Device Messages (3 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Limit of six Login IDs
reached
An attempt to enter a new
login ID was made, and the
limit of six login/password
combinations has been
reached.
H Delete another login/password
combination.
H Reenter the new login ID.
Limit of Mgmt PVCs
reached
New was selected from the H Do not create the
PVC Connection Table and
the maximum number of
management PVCs has
already been created.
management PVC.
H Delete another management
PVC, and try again.
Limit of PVC
Connections reached
New was selected from the H Do not create the PVC
PVC Connection Table and
the maximum number of
PVCs has already been
created.
connection.
H Delete another PVC
connection, and try again.
Name Must be Unique Name entered for a
management PVC has
Enter another 4-character name
for the logical/management link.
been used previously.
No Destination Link
DLCIs Available
New was selected from the Configure additional DLCIs for
PVC Connection Table, but the network link and try again.
even though DLCIs are
available to form a
connection, no DLCIs are
available on the network
link, which is a suitable
PVC Destination.
No DLCIs available for New was selected from the No action needed, or configure
connection
PVC Connection Table, but more DLCIs and try again.
all configured DLCIs have
been connected.
No DLCIs available for New was selected from the Configure more network and/or
connection
Management PVCs option
screen, but all Link/DLCI
pairs have been connected.
Port-1 Links/DLCIs pairs and try
again.
No DLCIs Available for New was selected from the Configure more network and/or
Mgmt PVC
Management PVCs option
screen, but all configured
DLCIs have been
Port-1 DLCIs and try again.
connected.
No DLCIs Defined
DLCI Records was selected Select New and create a DLCI
from an interface’s
record.
Configuration Edit/Display
menu, and no DLCI
Records have been created
for this interface.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-5. Device Messages (4 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
No more DLCIs
allowed
New or CopyFrom was
selected from an interface’s new DLCI Record.
DLCI Records configuration
Delete a DLCI, then create the
screen, and the maximum
number of DLCI Records
had already been reached.
No Primary
Destination Link
DLCIs Available
New or Modify was
Configure additional DLCIs for
the network link and try again.
selected from the PVC
Connection Table, but even
though DLCIs are available
to form a connection, no
DLCIs are available on the
network link, which is a
suitable Primary PVC
Destination.
If a network DLCI has been
entered as a Source DLCI:
1. Change the Source DLCI to a
user data port DLCI.
2. Enter the network DLCI as the
PVC’s Primary Destination.
No Security Records
to Delete
Delete was selected from
the Administer Login
screen, and no security
records had been defined.
H No action is needed.
H Enter a security record.
Password Matching
Error – Re-enter
Password
Password entered in the
Re-enter Password field of
the Administer Logins
screen does not match
what was entered in the
Password field.
H Try again.
H Contact your system
administrator to verify your
password.
Permission Denied
A file transfer was
attempted, but the:
(Seen at an FTP
terminal.)
H User did not have
H See your system administrator
to get your security level
changed.
Level 1 security.
H Wrong file was specified H Try again, entering the correct
when the put command
file with the put command.
was entered.
H User attempted to
upload a program file
from the unit.
H Enter the put command
instead of a get command;
you can only transfer files to
the unit, not from it.
See Upgrading System
Software in Chapter 7, FTP
Operation.
Please Wait
Port Inactive
Command takes longer
than 5 seconds.
Wait until message clears.
The port is disabled, or it
supports synchronous data
and is configured for leased
line mode when a DTE
Loopback was started.
No action is needed.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-5. Device Messages (5 of 5)
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Resetting Device,
Please Wait ...
Yes (or y) was entered in
the Reset COM Port
usage field of the System
Paused menu.
No action is needed.
Save Cancelled
Changes were made on the No action is needed.
Easy Install screen, but
when it came to saving the
changes, the Esc key was
pressed or No was entered
in response to the Save
Changes?prompt.
Test Active
No higher priority health
and status messages exist,
and a test is running.
H Contact service provider if test
initiated by the network.
H Wait until the test ends and
message clears.
H Cancel all tests from the Test
screen (Path: main/test).
H Stop the test from the same
screen the test was started
from.
User Interface
Already in Use
Two Telnet sessions are
already in use when an
attempt to access the
menu-driven user interface
through the COM port is
made.
H Wait and try again.
H Contact one of the IP address
user and request that they log
off.
IP addresses and logins of
the users currently
accessing the interface are
also provided.
User Interface Idle
Value Out of Range
Previously active session is Log on to the FrameSaver unit.
now closed/ended, and
access via the COM port is
now available.
Session has been ended
due to timeout.
No action is needed.
CIR entered for the DLCI is Enter a valid CIR (0 – 1536000).
a number greater than the
maximum allowed.
Excess Burst Size entered
for the DLCI is a number
greater than the maximum
allowed.
Enter a valid Excess Burst Size
(0 – 1536000).
DLCI Number entered is
less than 16 or greater
than 1007.
Enter a valid number
(16 – 1007).
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Status Information
Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit. The following
illustration shows the Status menu for the FrameSaver DSL unit.
Status Menu
main/status
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:02
STATUS
System and Test Status
PVC Connection Status
Network Interface Status
IP Routing Table
Performance Statistics
Trap Event Log
Display LEDs and Control Leads
Identity
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
NOTE:
Status messages in the following sections are in alphabetical order.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
System and Test Status Messages
System and test status information is selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
The following information is included on this screen:
H
H
H
H
Self-Test Results Messages
Last System Reset Date and Time
Health and Status Messages
Test Status Messages
Self-Test Results Messages
One of these self-test result messages appear in the Self-Test Results field at the
top of the System and Test Status screen.
Table 6-6. Self-Test Results Messages
Message
What It Indicates
What To Do
Failure xxxxxxxx
An internal failure occurred 1. Record the failure code.
(xxxxxxxx represents an
8-digit hexadecimal failure
2. Reset the unit.
code used by service
personnel).
3. Contact your service
representative.
Record the failure code
before resetting the unit;
otherwise, the error
information will be lost.
Passed
No problems were found
during power-on or reset.
No action needed.
Last System Reset Date and Time
This field indicates the last time the FrameSaver unit was reset. It appears after
the Self-Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen.
H
H
Date is in mm/dd/yyyy format (month/day/year).
Time is in mm:ss format (minutes:seconds).
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Health and Status Messages
The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the
FrameSaver DSL unit.
Table 6-7. Health and Status Messages (1 of 3)
Message
What It Indicates
AIS at Network 1
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is received by the
network interface. AIS is an unframed, all ones
signal. Possible reasons include:
H Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS
(keep-alive signal).
H The network is transmitting an AIS.
Auto-Configuration Active
Back-to-Back Mode Active
Auto-Configuration feature is active, which allows
automatic configuration and cross-connection of
DLCIs as they are reported by the network LMI.
The operating mode has been configured for
back-to-back operation (Main Menu → Control →
Change Operating Mode).
The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another
FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch
between them.
This feature is useful for product demonstrations
or for a point-to-point configuration using a leased
line.
CTS down to Port-1 Device
DLCI nnnn Down,
The user data port CTS control lead on the
FrameSaver unit is off.
The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down.
1,2
frame relay link
DTR Down from Port-1 Device
EER at Network 1
The DTR control lead from the device connected to
the user data port is deasserted.
The error rate of the received network signal
exceeds the currently configured threshold. This
condition only occurs if the network interface is
configured for ESF framing.
This condition clears when the error rate falls
below the threshold value, which may take up to
15 minutes.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-7. Health and Status Messages (2 of 3)
Message
What It Indicates
Ethernet Link Down
The Ethernet port is enabled, but communication
between the management system and the unit is
not currently possible on the port.
Link Down Administratively,
frame relay link
The specified frame relay link has been disabled
by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI
Protocol on another link is in a failed state.
2
This is not an alarm condition so System
Operationalappears, as well.
2
LMI Down, frame relay link
LOS at Network 1
The Local Management Interface(s) has been
declared down for the specified frame relay link.
A Loss of Signal (LOS) condition is detected on the
network interface. The condition is cleared as soon
as a signal is detected. Possible reasons include:
H Network cable problem.
H No signal is being transmitted at the far-end
unit.
Loss of Cell Delineation, atm link
The ATM Transmission Convergence (TC) layer
has been in an LCD state for one minute, or the
number of Out of Cell Delineation (OCD)
delineation events has exceeded the
user-specified threshold.
Network Com Link Down
OOF at Network 1
The communication link for the COM port is down,
and the COM port is configured for Net Link.
An Out of Frame (OOF) condition is detected on
the network interface. Possible reasons include:
H Incompatible framing format between the
network and the FrameSaver unit.
H Network cabling problem.
Primary Clock Failed
A failure of the primary clock source configured for
the unit is detected and the unit’s internal clock is
providing the timing.
This condition clears when the configured primary
clock is restored.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-7. Health and Status Messages (3 of 3)
Message
What It Indicates
SLV Timeout, DLCI nnnn,
frame relay link
An excessive number of SLV communication
responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit
have been missed on the specified multiplexed
DLCI; the DLCI is not suitable for user data.
1, 2, 3
When a hardware bypass capable device has
been detected at the other end of the PVC and this
condition occurs, only user data for EDLCI 0 will be
transmitted while this condition exists.
SNR Margin Threshold Exceed,
Network 1
The user-specified SNR margin threshold has
been exceeded.
Two Level-1 Users Accessing
Device
Two Level 1 users are already using the menu-
driven user interface; only two sessions can be
active at one time.
Time Slot Discovery in Progress,
Network 1
Time slot discovery is currently taking place to
determine the time slots that will be used for frame
relay traffic on the network interface.
This message only appears when the Time Slot
Discovery option is enabled (Main Menu →
Configuration → Time Slot Assignment → Frame
Relay Network Assignments) and an LMI failure is
detected on the network interface’s frame relay
link.
Yellow at Network 1
A yellow alarm signal is received on the network
interface. Possible reasons include:
H Network cable problem.
H T1 facility problem.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI.
3
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Test Status Messages
These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status
screen. You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test.
See Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, for more information on tests, including how to
start and stop them.
Table 6-8. Test Status Messages (1 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
DCLB Active, [Net1-FR1/Port-1]
A Data Channel V.54 Loopback (DCLB) is active
on the T1 network frame relay link, or on the data
for the user data port.
DTE External LB Active, Port-1
DTE Init. Ext LB Active, Port-1
DTPLB Active, Port-1
An external DTE Loopback is running on the user
data port.
The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback
on the user data port.
A Data Terminal Payload Loopback (DTPLB) is
active for the specified slot and port.
Lamp Test Active
The Lamp Test is active, causing the LEDs on the
faceplate to flash on and off.
LLB Active, Network 1
A network Line Loopback (LLB) is active on the
specified interface.
Monitor Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the
specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link.
1,2
Monitor Pttn Active, [Interface]
A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified
interface.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports
that have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
No Test Active
No tests are currently running.
PLB Active, Network 1
A Payload Loopback (PLB) is active on the
specified interface.
PVC Loopback Active, DLCI nnnn, A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI
1,2
frame_relay_link
on the frame relay link.
RLB Active, Network 1
A network Repeater Loopback (RLB) is active on
the specified interface.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-8. Test Status Messages (2 of 2)
Message
What It Indicates
Send Pttn Active, DLCI nnnn,
frame_relay_link
The unit is monitoring the selected test pattern on
the specified DLCI for the interface.
1,2
Send Pttn Active, [Interface]
A Send Pattern test is active on the specified
interface.
This test cannot be activated on user data ports
that have Port Use set to Frame Relay.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
PVC Connection Status
PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu.
Main Menu → Status → PVC Connection Status
Only PVC connections with Source DLCIs configured to be Active are shown.
This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay.
PVC Connection Status Screen Example
main/status/connections
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:03
Page 1 of 2
PVC CONNECTION STATUS
Primary Destination
Source
Link
DLCI EDLCI
Link
DLCI EDLCI
Status
Port-1 201
Port-1 202
Port-1 100
Port-1 204
Mgmt PVC Mgm205
Port-1 206
Port-1 207
Port-1 208
Port-1 209
Port-1 210
Net1-FR1
300
1001
1001
1001
(0,35)
1001
1001
500
0
0
2
2
Active
Active
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Net1-FR1
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
502
504
2
2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgUp PgDn
If the No PVC Connectionsmessage appears instead of a list of PVC
connections, no PVC connections have been configured yet.
Table 6-9. PVC Connection Status (1 of 2)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Link
Identifies the cross-connection of
DLCIs configured for the unit.
Net1-FR1
H Source/destination is frame relay
link 1 on Network 1
Port-1
H User data port – Port-1
Mgmt PVCName
H Virtual circuit is a management
link that terminates in the unit,
where Name is the link name
DLCI
DLCI (16–1007)
or
Identifies an individual link.
(VPI,VCI) (0–15,31–255)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-9. PVC Connection Status (2 of 2)
Field
Status
What It Indicates
EDLCI
0 to 62
For multiplexed DLCIs only.
Identifies an individual link/
connection embedded within a
DLCI.
Status
Identifies whether the physical
interfaces, LMIs, and DLCIs are all
enabled and active for this PVC
connection.
1
Active
H The PVC is currently active.
Inactive
H The PVC is inactive because:
– Alarm conditions and network
and SLV communication
status indicate that data
cannot be successfully
passed.
– The unit has disabled the
interface or frame relay link
due to internal operating
conventions.
– Activation of an alternate
virtual circuit is not warranted;
that is, no alarm condition on
the primary destination link
has been detected.
Disabled
H The PVC cannot be activated
and is essentially disabled as a
result of how the unit was
configured. Possible causes:
– The physical interface at one
or both ends of the PVC is/are
disabled.
– The frame relay link on one or
both ends of the PVC is/are
disabled.
Invalid
H Some portion of the PVC
connection is not fully configured.
1
For the circuit to be active, both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Network Interface Status
Network Interface Status can be viewed from the Status menu.
Main Menu → Status → Network Interface Status
Network Interface Status Screen Example
main/status/network
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:04
NETWORK 1 INTERFACE STATUS
Operating Rate(Kbps):
Receiver Attenuation(dB):
SNR Margin(dB):
2320
0
15.5
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgUp PgDn
Table 6-10. Network Interface Status
Field
Status
What It Indicates
Operating Rate
144, 192, 272, 384, 400, The DSL line rate.
528, 768, 1168, 1552,
2320
Disconnected
Auto-rating
The line is disconnected.
The unit is in the process of
determining the line rate.
Receiver
Attenuation(dB)
–3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12
The loss of signal strength of the
received DSL network signal,
assuming the far end was
transmitting at 13.5 dB.
Disconnected
The line is disconnected.
SNR Margin(dB)
–64 to +63.5 dB
in 0.5 dB increments
The amount of increased noise the
system can tolerate on the DSL
network interface without exceeding
–7
a Bit Error Rate of 10
.
Disconnected
The line is disconnected.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
IP Routing Table
Use the IP Routing Table to see all the routes configured in the FrameSaver unit.
Main Menu → Status → IP Routing Table
IP Routing Table Screen Example
main/status/ip_rout
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:05
Page 1 of 2
IP ROUTING TABLE
Gateway
Destination
Mask
Hop Type
Interface
TTL
135.001.001.000 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 FFF.EEE.FFF.FFF 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.220.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.221.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.220.000 255.255.255.000 135.042.001.254 1
135.001.222.111 255.255.255.000 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.222.113 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
135.001.002.111 255.255.255.255 135.026.001.254 1
Tmp
NMS
Loc
Loc
Loc
RIP
RIP
NMS
NMS
NMS
PVCMgmt1001
PVCMgmt1002
Ethernet
COM
130
130
999
999
999
30
30
2
48
21
COM
Ethernet
PVCMgmt1003
PVCMgmt1004
PVCMgmt1005
PVCMgmt1006
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgDn PgUp
The table is sorted by the Destination IP address, from the lowest number to the
highest. If no routes exist, the No Routesmessage appears instead of routing
information.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-11. IP Routing Table Values
Column
What It Indicates
Destination
The Destination IP Address for the route:
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255
Mask
The Destination Subnet Mask for the route:
H 000.000.000.000 – 225.255.255.255 for network routes
H FFF.FFF.FFF.FFF for host routes
H 127 may appear as well. It is a reserved number.
Gateway
Hop
The Gateway IP Address for the route:
001.000.000.000 – 223.255.255.255
The number of hops in the route to the destination (1–15).
If 16 appears, the route is in the process of being aged out.
Type
The method used to add the route to the table.
H RIP: The route was discovered through Routing Information
Protocol.
The route remains until its TTL (Time to Live) expires, a
better route is provided via RIP, or there is a power reset.
H Loc: The route was added due to the FrameSaver unit’s
local configuration; a Default IP Address or an SNMP
Manager Initial Route Destination have been configured.
The route remains until the unit’s configuration changes.
H NMS: The route was added by a Network Management
System using SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol).
The route remains until there is a power reset of the unit.
H Tmp: The route was added as a temporary route in order to
respond to an IP packet that was received.
The route remains until its TTL expires or there is a power
reset.
Interface
Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination.
H COM: Communications port
H Ethernet: Ethernet port
H PVCname: Name of the management PVC
(e.g., PVCMgmt1001)
H Internal: The interface to be used for software loopbacks or
internal device functions in order to reach the destination.
TTL
The Time to Live that was set for the route, in seconds: 1 – 999
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Performance Statistics
Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a
selected interface. Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the
severity and frequency or duration of a condition.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics
Physical and link layer statistics (Layers 1 and 2) are collected on the port. The
following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected.
Performance Statistics Menu
main/status/performance
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:06
PERFORMANCE STATISTICS
Service Level Verification
DLCI
Frame Relay
ATM
Ethernet
Clear All Statistics
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Clearing Performance Statistics
Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a
directly-connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level
is Level-1. This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems.
Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature. True statistic counts
are always maintained so SLAs can be verified, and they can be viewed from an
SNMP NMS. However, since statistics can be cleared locally, the statistics viewed
via the menu-driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the
NMS.
" Procedure
To clear all statistics:
Performance Statistics → Clear All Statistics
" Procedure
To clear specific sets of statistics:
H
Use the ClrSLV&DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI
performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of
the following screens:
Performance Statistics → Service Level Verification
Performance Statistics → DLCI
H
H
Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance
statistics.
Performance Statistics → Frame Relay
Use the ClrNearStats or ClrFarStats function key to reset all near-end or all
far-end Extended SuperFrame (ESF) line performance statistics.
Performance Statistics → ESF Line
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Service Level Verification Performance Statistics
These statistics appear when Service Level Verification (SLV) is selected from
the Performance Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Service Level Verification
They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCIs are multiplexed. In
addition, this screen only appears for units with the SLV feature set, when Service
Type is set to Frame Relay.
Table 6-12. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (1 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Far End Circuit
Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI/VCI (Virtual Path
Identifier/Virtual Channel Identifier) at the other end of the
connection.
If the far-end circuit is a DLCI, the DLCI number (16–1007)
appears. If a VPI/VCI, the number is displayed as xx,yyy,
xx being the VPI number (0 –15) and yyy being the VCI
number (32–2047).
Noneappears if the unit has not communicated with the other
end.
Far End IP Addr
IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed
DLCI connection.
Noneappears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated
with the other end, or if the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured.
Dropped SLV
Responses
The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a
response from the far-end device has not been received.
Inbound Dropped
Frames *
Total number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were dropped in transit.
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is
32
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 4-3, Service Level
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to
appear.
H Above CIR *
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the committed information rate and were
dropped in transit.
H Within CIR *
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were within the committed information rate, but were
dropped in transit.
H Between CIR&EIR * H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were between the committed information rate and excess
information rate, and were dropped in transit.
*
Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-12. Service Level Verification Performance Statistics (2 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
H Above EIR *
H The number of frames transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the excess information rate and were dropped
in transit.
Inbound Dropped
Characters *
Total number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were dropped in transit.
The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is
32
reached (2 –2), then the count starts over.
The SLV Delivery Ratio option (see Table 4-3, Service Level
Verification Options) must be enabled for these statistics to
appear. NAappears instead of a statistical count if FDR/DDR
(Frame Delivery Ratio/Data Delivery Ratio) information is not
being received from the far-end device .
H Above CIR *
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the committed information rate and were
dropped in transit.
H Within CIR *
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were within within the committed information rate, but were
dropped in transit.
H Between CIR&EIR * H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were between the committed information rate and excess
information rate, and were dropped in transit.
H Above EIR *
H The number of bytes transmitted by the far-end device that
were above the excess information rate and were dropped
in transit.
Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI connection.
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device is
not successful.
Avg RdTrip Latency
Average round trip latency, measured in milliseconds, between
the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the
multiplexed DLCI connection.
Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling
interval and the average is computed (using packets with the
configured SLV Packet Size (bytes), Table 4-3, Service Level
Verification Options) over the previous 15-minute period. If
SLV Packet Size is changed, a new average is not available
until a new sample has been received.
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.
Max RdTrip Latency
Same as average (Avg RdTrip Latency), but storing the
maximum value of latency over the previous 15-minute
interval.
Unknownappears if communication with the far-end device
over the last 15 minutes has not been successful.
*
Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the
connection. If the far-end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit, frame relay, latency,
and FDR/DDR (Frame Relay Delivery Ratio/Data Delivery Ratio) performance
statistics are collected. If the far-end device is a non-FrameSaver device, or a
FrameSaver 9120 or 9620, only frame relay statistics are collected.
DLCI Performance Statistics
These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics
menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → DLCI
This screen only appears when Service Type is set to Frame Relay.
Table 6-13. DLCI Performance Statistics (1 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
*
DLCI Up Since
Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a
period of inactivity. Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive.
If the DLCI was Down, this is the time that the DLCI recovered.
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the first time the unit
discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.
*
DLCI Up Time
Days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the DLCI was last
declared Active after a period of inactivity. Down is displayed if
the DLCI is inactive.
If the DLCI was Down, this is the amount of time since the
DLCI recovered.
If the DLCI was never Down, this is the amount of time since
the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network.
Total Tx Frames/
Tx Octets
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes)
transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.
**
H Within CIR
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were
within the committed information rate.
H Between
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were
between the committed information rate and excess
information rate.
**
CIR&EIR
**
H Above EIR
H The number of frames and octets sent by the far-end device
on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above
the excess information rate.
H With DE Set
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI
of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.
*
Only appears for the network interface.
** Only appears for units with the SLV feature set.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-13. DLCI Performance Statistics (2 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
H With BECN Set
H The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI
of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion
notifications.
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN
indicator.
Total Rx Frames/
Rx Octets
Total number of data frames and octets (8-bit bytes) received
for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link.
**
H Within CIR
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed
information rate.
H Between
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the
**
CIR&EIR
committed information rate and excess information rate.
**
H Above EIR
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess
information rate.
H With DE Set
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set.
H With BECN Set
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit
congestion notifications.
BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in
the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN
indicator.
H With FECN Set
H The number of frames and octets received on the selected
DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion
notifications.
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the
FECN indicator.
** Only appears for units with the SLV feature set.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Frame Relay Performance Statistics
The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the
Performance Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Frame Relay
32
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2),
then the count starts over. The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear
when multiple frame relay links have been configured.
Table 6-14. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (1 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
Frame Relay Link
Frames Sent
The number of frames sent over the interface.
Frames Received
Characters Sent
Characters Received
FECNs Received
The number of frames received over the interface.
The number of data octets (bytes) sent over the interface.
The number of data octets (bytes) received over the interface.
The number of foreword explicit congestion notifications
received over the interface.
The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the
FECN indicator.
BECNs Received
The number of backward explicit congestion notifications
received over the interface.
The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic
congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the
BECN indicator.
Frame Relay Errors
Total Errors
The number of total frame relay errors, excluding LMI errors.
Short frames, long frames, invalid DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and
unknown errors are included in this total.
Indicates that there may be a non-frame relay device on the
other end of the link, or the units at either the far-end or both
ends of the link may be configured incorrectly.
Invalid Rx Frames
Long Rx Frames
The number of invalid frames received over the Network or
Port-1 interface.
There is a non-frame relay device on the other end of the link.
The number of frames received over the Network or Port-1
interface that were more than 8192-octets in length.
The device on the far end of the link may be configured
incorrectly.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-14. Frame Relay Performance Statistics (2 of 2)
Statistic What It Indicates
Frame Relay Errors (cont’d)
Unknown Error
The number of frames received over the interface that do not
fall into one of the other statistic categories.
Indicates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize.
Frame Relay LMI
LMI Protocol
The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link.
Normal condition.
Status Msg Received
Total LMI Errors
The number of LMI status messages received over the
interface.
Normal condition.
The number of LMI errors. Reliability errors, protocol errors,
unknown report types, unknown information elements, and
sequence errors are included in this total.
Network problems.
Number of Inactives
The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link
Inactive.
Network problems.
Frame Relay HDLC Errors
Rx Total Errors
The number of receiver errors on the interface. The following
are included in this count:
H Receive invalid frames (short frames, long frames, invalid
DLCIs, unknown DLCIs, and unknown errors)
H Rx Total Discards
H Receive errors (non-octet aligned frames, frames with CRC
errors, and Rx Overruns)
Rx Total Discards
The number of receiver discards on the interface. The
following are included in this count:
H Resource errors
H Rx Overruns
H Frames received when the link was down
H Inactive and disconnected DLCIs
H Inactive destination DLCIs
H Unknown EDLCIs
Rx CRC Errors
Tx Total Errors
The number of received CRC (cycle redundancy check) errors.
The total number of transmit errors on the interface, including
transmits discards and transmit overruns.
Tx Total Discards
The total number of transmit discards on the interface,
including underrun flushes.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
ATM Performance Statistics
The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the
Performance Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → ATM
32
All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached (2 –2),
then the count starts over.
Table 6-15. ATM Performance Statistics (1 of 2)
Statistic
AAL5
What It Indicates
Tx PDUs
The number of ATM Adaption Layer (AAL5) Common Part
Convergence Sublayer (CPCS) Protocol Data Units (PDUs)
passed to the lower layer for transmission.
Rx PDUs
The number of received AAL5 CPCS PDUs passed to a higher
layer.
Tx Octets
The number of AAL5 CPCS octets (bytes) passed to the lower
layer for transmission.
Rx Octets
The number of received AAL5 CPCS octets (bytes) passed to
a higher layer.
Errored Tx PDUs
Errored Rx PDUs
Discarded Tx PDUs
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs that could not be
transmitted due to errors.
The number of received AAL5 CPCS PDUs that contained
errors.
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received for transmission
that were discarded.
Discarded Rx PDUs
TC Sublayer
The number of received AAL5 CPCS PDUs discarded.
Total Tx Cells
The number of cells transmitted.
Total Rx Cells
The number of cells received.
Total Rx Cells
Dropped
The number of received cells dropped due to errors.
Rx HEC Errors
The number of cells received whose HEC fields were in error.
Unknown Rx Cells
The number of received cells discarded during cell header
validation. These include:
H Cells with unrecognized VPI/VCI values
H Cells with invalid cell header patterns
H Cells with undefined Payload Type Indicators
Last Unknown
VPI,VCI
The VPI/VCI of the last cell discarded due to an unrecognized
VPI/VCI. If no such cells have been discarded, None appears
in this field.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Table 6-15. ATM Performance Statistics (2 of 2)
Statistic
What It Indicates
OCD Events
The number of times Out of Cell Delineation (OCD) events
have been detected. An OCD event is declared when 7
consecutive cells with HEC violations are detected.
Cell Delineation State Whether the cell last received was in synchronization. Possible
values are:
H In Sync
H Out of Sync
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Ethernet Performance Statistics
The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance
Statistics menu.
Main Menu → Status → Performance Statistics → Ethernet
Statistic
What It Indicates
Port Rate (Mbps)
The operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port. One of
the following may appear for this statistic:
H Disconnected – The line is not connected.
H 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps – The Ethernet port is operating at
this rate.
H Disabled – The Ethernet port has been disabled.
Duplex
The duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port. One of the
following may appear for this statistic:
H Disconnected – The line is not connected.
H Full – The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode
(4-wire).
H Half – The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode
(2-wire).
H Disabled – The Ethernet port has been disabled.
The number of successfully transmitted frames on the port.
The number of frames received on the port.
Frames Transmitted
Frames Received
Errored Frames
The number of errors detected on the port. Possible errors
include:
H Internal transmit and receive errors
H Transmitter and receiver overruns
H Receive checksum errors
H Alignment errors
H Long frames
Excessive Collisions
Carrier Sense Errors
The number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive
collisions.
The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost, or
was never asserted, during frame transmissions.
Deferred
Transmissions
The number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being
busy.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
Trap Event Log
The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log. The
following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP
trap for a physical interface, and for the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These
alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System
and Test Status screen.
Main Menu → Status → Trap Event Log
Trap Event Log Screen Example
main/status/event_log
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 06:07
TRAP EVENT LOG
Total Trap Events:
4
Time Elapsed
_Since Event_
_Event________________________________________
0d 23:59:59 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync
6d 00:01:02 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1” up.
10d 10:21:32 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link “Port-1” down.
364d 11:13:14 Unit reset.
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
Refresh PgUp PgDn
Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen, the most current first. Page
down (PgDn) to view less current trap events. When no trap events have been
logged, No Events in Log.appears in the Event column.
ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables
contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps in Appendix B, SNMP MIBs
and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation and Maintenance
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
7
This chapter includes the following information:
H
FTP File Transfers
— Upgrading System Software
— Determining Whether a Download is Completed
— Changing Software
— Transferring Collected Data
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
FTP File Transfers
The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server
over Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). A complete binary image of the
configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup. To use this
feature, the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions.
Using this feature, you can transfer configuration files to/from a FrameSaver
node, program files to a FrameSaver node, and User History data from a
FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a
management PVC, or through the COM port.
Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer:
H
You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get
commands. However, you can retrieve the data file for the user history
reports regardless of access level.
H
You cannot put a configuration file to the factory.cfg or current.cfg files
under the system directory. Configuration files should be put to a customer
file (cust1.cfg or cust2.cfg), then loaded into the downloaded unit’s Current
Configuration via the menu-driven user interface.
H
H
H
You can only put a NAM program file (nam.ocd) into a FrameSaver unit. You
cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host.
Before putting a download file, you must use the bin binary command to
place the data connection in binary transfer mode.
When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS, you can only get
a uhbcfull.dat file. It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get
this information (see Transferring Collected Data).
H
H
H
A data file (uhbcfull.dat or lmitrace.syc) cannot be put into a FrameSaver
node.
LMI packet capture data (lmitrace.syc) is not readable when the LMI Packet
Capture Utility is active.
The SLV user history file is only available to units with the SLV feature set.
FrameSaver units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be
downloaded in the background, using the selected bandwidth and without
interfering with normal operation. Downloads can be performed quickly, using the
full line speed, or at a slower rate over an extended period of time.
You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would
initiate an FTP to any other IP-addressable device.
NOTE:
Loading a configuration with many DLCIs from a unit’s Customer
Configuration 1 or 2 option area into its Current Configuration area may take
time. Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit’s
currently active configuration.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
" Procedure
To initiate an FTP session:
1. Start the FTP client program on your host. For example, on a UNIX host,
type ftp, followed by the FrameSaver unit’s IP address.
2. If a login and password are required (see Creating a Login in Chapter 5,
Security and Logins), you are prompted to enter them. If not, press Enter.
The FTP prompt appears.
The starting directory is the root directory (/). Use standard FTP commands
during the FTP session, as well as the following remote FTP commands.
Command
Definition
cd directory
Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the
specified directory.
dir [directory]
get file1 [file2]
Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory.
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.
Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node
to the local directory on the host (for configuration files only).
remotehelp
[command]
Print the meaning of the command. If no argument is given, a
list of all known commands is printed.
ls [directory]
Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory’s contents.
If no directory is specified, the current one is used.
put file1 [file2]
Copy file1 from a local directory on the host to file 2 in the
current directory of the FrameSaver node. If file2 is not
specified, the file will be named file1 on the FrameSaver node.
recv file1 [file 2]
send file1 [file 2]
pwd
Same as a get.
Same as a put.
Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit
node.
bin
Places the FTP session in binary-transfer mode.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
Upgrading System Software
If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit’s program code, you must transfer
the upgrade of the nam.ocd file in the system memory directory using the put
command.
NOTE:
Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC,
or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link (see Table 4-18,
Communication Port Options).
" Procedure
To download software:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading.
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.
4. Type cd system to change to the system directory.
5. Perform a put of Rxxxxxx.ocd (xxxxxx being the software release number) to
the nam.ocd file to start the upgrade.
If the message displayed is . . .
Then . . .
nam.ocd: File Transfer Complete
The download was successful. The file is
loaded into system memory.
nam.ocd: File Transfer Failed –
Invalid file
The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit.
A different Rxxxxxx.ocd file will need to be
downloaded. Repeat the step or end the
FTP session.
NOTE:
During the download, a series of hash marks (#) appear. When the hash
marks stop appearing, there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the
nam.ocd: File Transfer Completemessage appears. Please be
patient. Do not exit from FTP at this time.
See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
Determining Whether a Download Is Completed
To see whether a download has completed, check the Identity screen.
Main Menu → Status → Identity
Check Alternate Software Rev. under the NAM Identity column.
H
H
H
If a software revision number appears, the file transfer is complete.
If In Progressappears, the file is still being transferred.
If Invalidappears, no download has occurred or the download was not
successful.
Changing Software
Once a software upgrade is downloaded, it needs to be activated. When
activated, the unit resets, then executes the downloaded software. With this
feature, you control when the upgrade software is implemented.
" Procedure
To switch to the new software:
1. Go to the Control menu, and select Select Software Release.
Main Menu → Control → Select Software Release
The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just
transferred are shown.
If the download failed, Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field
instead of the new release number. Repeat the procedure in Upgrading
System Software if this occurs.
2. Select Switch&Reset.
3. Enter Yes to the Are you sure? prompt. The unit resets and begins
installing the newly transferred software.
4. Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current
Software Revision.
Main Menu → Status → Identity
NOTE:
If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit’s Identity
screen while the unit is downloading software, the In Progress...
message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field.
See Displaying System Information in Chapter 6, Operation and
Maintenance, to see what is included on the unit’s Identity screen.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Operation
Transferring Collected Data
SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an
NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP, which is faster than other
methods. The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the
FTP Max Transfer Rate (Kbps) option (see Table 4-14, Telnet and FTP Session
Options in Chapter 4, Configuration Options).
NOTES:
Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet
data; the data files are not in user-readable format. LMI packet capture data
can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log (see Viewing Captured Packets
from the Menu-Driven User Interface in Chapter 8, Troubleshooting, for
additional information).
" Procedure
To retrieve data:
1. Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data
will be retrieved.
2. Type bin to enter binary transfer mode.
3. Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the
upgrade, provided this function is supported by your equipment.
4. Type cd data to change to the data directory.
If retrieving . . .
Then . . .
SLV statistics
Perform a get of the uhbcfull.dat file.
H File Transfer Complete– Transfer was
successful.
H File Transfer Failed– Transfer was not
successful. Try again or end the session.
LMI packet capture data
1. Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility.
Main Menu → Control → LMI Packet Capture Utility
LMI packet capture data is not available (readable)
when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active.
2. Perform a get of the lmitrace.syc file.
One of the following will display for the file:
– File Transfer Complete
– File Transfer Failed
– Permission Denied– The LMI Packet
Capture Utility was not readable. Stop the LMI
Packet Capture Utility and try again.
3. Close the FTP session.
SLV statistics and/or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
This chapter includes the following:
H
H
Problem Indicators
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication
— Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu
— Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power
— Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature
— Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface
Alarms
H
H
H
H
H
Trap Event Log
Troubleshooting Tables
— Device Problems
— ATM Problems
— Frame Relay PVC Problems
Tests Available
H
H
H
— Test Timeout Feature
Starting and Stopping a Test
— Aborting All Tests
PVC Tests
— PVC Loopback
— Send Pattern
— Monitor Pattern
— Connectivity
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
H
H
H
DTE Loopback
IP Ping Test
Lamp Test
Problem Indicators
The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems:
Indicators . . .
See . . .
LEDs
Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in
Chapter 6, Operation and Maintenance, as well as the
user interface screen.
Main Menu → Status →
Display LEDs and Control LEDs
Health and status
Health and Status Messages in Chapter 6, Operation and
Maintenance.
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu-driven
user interface screen.
Performance statistics
Performance Statistics in Chapter 6, Operation and
Maintenance, to help you determine how long a problem
has existed.
Alarm conditions that will
generate an SNMP trap
Alarms on page 8-7.
SNMP traps
Appendix B, SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm
Defaults.
Traps supported include warm-start, authentication-failure,
enterprise-specific (those specific to the unit), link-up, and
link-down.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication
You can reset the unit in one of four ways:
H
H
H
Reset it from the Control menu.
Cycle the power.
Reset the configuration options for the COM port, or reload the factory default
settings.
H
Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS (see your NMS documentation).
The unit performs a self-test when it is reset.
Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu
Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power-on self-test of the unit.
" Procedure
To reset the unit from the Control menu:
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Control.
2. Select Reset Device and press Enter. The Are You Sure?prompt
appears.
3. Type y (Yes) and press Enter. The unit reinitializes itself, performing a
self-test.
Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power
Disconnecting, then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Restoring Communication with an Improperly Configured Unit
Improperly configuring the unit could render the menu-driven user interface
inaccessible. If this occurs, connectivity to the unit can be restored via a directly
connected asynchronous terminal.
" Procedure
To reset COM port settings:
1. Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19.2 kbps, using character
length of 8 bits, with one stop-bit, and no parity. In addition, set Flow Control
to None.
2. Reset the unit, then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen
appears. (See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other
methods of resetting the unit.)
3. Tab to the desired prompt, and type y (Yes) at one of the prompts.
If selecting . . .
The following occurs . . .
Reset COM Port usage
H Port Use is set to Terminal so the
asynchronous terminal can be used.
H Data Rate (Kbps), Character Length, Stop Bits,
and Parity are reset to the factory defaults.
H Unit resets itself.
Reload Factory Defaults
H All configuration and control settings are reset
to the Default Factory Configuration,
overwriting the current configuration.
H Unit resets itself.
CAUTION: This causes the current configuration
to be destroyed and a self-test to be performed.
If no selection is made within 30 seconds, or if No (n) is entered, the unit
resets itself and no configuration changes are made.
Once the unit resets itself, connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen
appears.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Management Link Feature
A dedicated troubleshooting management link is available to help service
providers isolate device problems within their networks. This feature allows Telnet
or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is
essentially transparent to customer operations. No alarms or SNMP traps are
generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer.
See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 4, Configuration Options, for
additional information about this feature.
LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature
A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI
errors are detected. Using this utility, any enabled frame relay link on the user
data port or network interface can be selected. The utility captures any LMI
packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called lmitrace.syc in the
system’s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network
Associates Sniffer for analysis.
The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information. See
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface for additional
information on this feature.
" Procedure
To use this utility:
1. Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility.
Main Menu → Control → LMI Packet Capture Utility
2. Select an enabled frame relay link, or Capture Interface, either Net1-FR1
or Port-1.
3. Start packet capture.
While capturing data, the status is Active. Packets in Buffer indicates the
number of packets that have been captured. Up to 8000 packets can be held.
When the buffer is full, the oldest packets will be overwritten.
4. To stop the utility, press Enter. The field toggles back to Start.
5. Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the
information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for
debugging/decoding.
See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 7, FTP Operation, for additional
information about this feature.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu-Driven User Interface
The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log. Once the capture
buffer or trace log is full, the oldest packets are overwritten. To view the most
recently captured packets using the menu-driven user interface:
LMI Packet Capture Utility → Display LMI Trace Log
LMI Trace Log Example
main/control/lmi_capture/display_log
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 08:01
LMI TRACE LOG
Page 1 of 3
Packets Transmitted to Net1-FR1
LMI Record #1 at 0 s
Packets Received from Net1-FR1
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023
Sequence Number Exchange
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177
LMI Record #2 at 0 s
Status Enquiry Message, 13 bytes
LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023
Sequence Number Exchange
Send Seq #181, Rcv Seq #177
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Refresh PgUp PgDn
Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI
messages.
The following information is provided:
H
The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet (1–8000), and the
amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured.
The maximum amount of time displayed is 4,294,967 seconds (s), which is
reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded.
H
H
H
H
H
The type of message, either Status or Status Enquiry, from the captured
packet, and the number of bytes in the packet.
The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured
packet, and the DLCI number for the packet.
The type of information contained in the captured packet, either Sequence
Number Exchange or Full Status Report.
The send and receive (rcv) sequence numbers from the captured packet
(0–255).
On the Packets Received side of the screen, PVC status for up to ten DLCIs
can be shown. It shows the DLCI number, its active bit status, and if Standard
LMI is running, the DLCI’s CIR value.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Alarms
The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP
trap for a physical interface, and the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These alarm
conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and
Test Status screen.
Main Menu → Status → System and Test Status
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (1 of 4)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
CTS down to
Port-1 Device
The CTS control lead on
the device’s interface is off. Port-1.
Check DTR and RTS from
H Verify that the port is enabled.
H Check DTR from the user data
port.
DLCI nnnn Down,
frame relay link
The DLCI for the specified
frame relay link is down.
Verify that the network LMI is up.
If it is, contact your network
service provider.
1,2
DTR Down from
Port-1 Device
The DTR control lead on
the device connected to the cable connected to the system’s
specified port is off. This
message applies to data
ports that act as DCEs.
Examine the attached DTE and
port.
H Check that the port cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
H Check the status of the
attached equipment.
Ethernet Link Down
The communication link for Check the LAN connected to the
the Ethernet port is down
and the Interface Status for
the port is enabled.
Ethernet port.
Link Down
Administratively,
frame relay link
The specified frame relay
link has been disabled by
the unit due to LMI
Verify that the network LMI is up.
If it is, contact your network
provider.
2
Behavior conditions or LMI
Protocol on another link is
in a failed state.
This is not an alarm
condition so System
Operationalappears,
as well.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
frame relay link is one of the following:
2
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (2 of 4)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
LMI Down,
frame relay link
The Local Management
Interface is down for the
specified frame relay link.
For the network interface:
2
H If LMI was never up, verify
that the LMI Protocol setting
reflects the LMI type being
used.
H If LMI was never up:
– Verify that the proper time
slots have been configured.
– Verify that the LMI Protocol
setting reflects the LMI type
being used.
H Verify that Frame Relay
Performance Statistics show
LMI frames being transmitted.
If all of the above have been
verified and the physical link is
not in Alarm, contact your
network provider.
LMI Down,
frame relay link
The Local Management
Interface is down for the
specified frame relay link.
For user data port:
2
H Check that the DTE cable is
securely attached at both
ends.
H Verify that Transmit Clock
Source and Invert Transmit
Clock options are properly
configured.
H Verify that Frame Relay
Performance Statistics show
LMI frames being received. If
no frames are being received:
– Check the attached device.
– Verify that the LMI Protocol
setting reflects the LMI type
being used.
LOS at Network 1
A Loss of Signal (LOS)
condition is detected on the
network interface. Clears
when a signal is detected.
H Network cable problem.
H Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
H No signal is being
transmitted at the far-end
FrameSaver unit.
H Check far-end FrameSaver
unit status.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network port, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (3 of 4)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
Loss of Cell
Delineation, atm link
The ATM Transmission
Convergence (TC) layer
has been in an LCD state
for one minute, or the
number of Out of Cell
Delineation (OCD)
Contact your network provider.
delineation events has
exceeded the
user-specified threshold.
Network Com Link
Down
The communication link for Check the router connected to
the COM port is down and
the COM port is configured
for Net Link.
the COM port.
OOF at Network 1
An Out of Frame (OOF)
condition is detected on the
network interface.
H Incompatible framing
format between the
network and the
H Check that the framing format
for the network interface is
correct.
FrameSaver unit.
H Network cabling
H Check that the network cable
is securely attached at both
ends.
problem.
Self-Test Failure
The unit did not pass its
basic verification tests
when it was powered on or
reset.
H Reset the unit.
H Contact your service
representative.
SLV Timeout,
DLCI nnnn,
frame relay link
An excessive number of
SLV communication
responses from the remote service provider.
system have been missed
on the specified multiplexed
DLCI and link.
Verify that the network LMI is up.
If it is, contact your network
1,2
If the frame relay link is
Net1-FR1, the timeout is on
the network FrameRly1
timeslot assignment.
When a hardware bypass-
capable device has been
detected at the other end of
the PVC and this condition
occurs, only user data for
EDLCI 0 will be transmitted
as long as the condition
exists.
1
nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007.
2
frame relay link is one of the following:
– Net1-FR1. The frame relay link specified for the network interface, Network 1.
– Port-1. The frame relay link associated with the user data port.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 8-1. Alarm Conditions (4 of 4)
Alarm Condition
What It Indicates
What To Do
SNR Margin
Threshold Exceed,
Network 1
The user-specified SNR
margin threshold has been
exceeded.
Contact your network provider.
Two Level-1 Users
Accessing Device
Another user with Level-1
security access is currently users are accessing the unit if
accessing the unit.
Wait until no other Level-1
testing or configuration will be
performed.
Be aware that actions of
the other user may override
your test commands and
configuration changes.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Trap Event Log
The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log. The
following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP
trap for a physical interface, and for the frame relay LMIs and DLCIs. These
alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System
and Test Status screen.
See Trap Event Log in Chapter 6, Operation and Maintenance.
Troubleshooting Tables
The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble-free service. However, if a
problem occurs, refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for
possible solutions.
Device Problems
Table 8-2. Device Problems (1 of 2)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No power, or the LEDs The power cord is not
Check that the power cord is
securely attached at both ends.
are not lit.
securely plugged into the
wall receptacle to rear
panel connection.
The wall receptacle has no
power.
H Check the wall receptacle
power by plugging in some
equipment that is known to be
working.
H Check the circuit breaker.
H Verify that your site is not on
an energy management
program.
Power-On Self-Test
fails. Only Alarm LED
is on after power-on.
The unit has detected an
internal hardware failure.
H Reset the unit and try again.
H Contact your service
representative.
H Return the unit to the factory
(refer to Warranty, Sales,
Service, and Training
Information on page A of this
document).
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Table 8-2. Device Problems (2 of 2)
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
Cannot access the
unit or the
menu-driven user
interface.
Login or password is
incorrect, COM port is
improperly configured, or
the unit is otherwise
configured so it prevents
access.
H Reset the unit (see
Restoring Communication
with an Improperly Configured
Unit.)
H Contact your service
representative.
Failure xxxxxxxx
The unit has detected an
internal software failure.
H Record the 8-digit code from
the System and Test Status
screen.
appears at the top of
the System and Test
Status screen, at
Self-Test Results.
H Reset the unit and try again.
H Contact your service
representative and provide the
8-digit failure code.
An LED appears
dysfunctional.
LED is burned out.
Run the Lamp Test. If the LED in
question does not flash with the
other LEDs, then contact your
service representative.
Not receiving data.
Network cable loose or
broken.
H Reconnect or repair the cable.
H Call the network service
provider.
Receiving data errors
on a multiplexed DLCI, being used for automatic
but frame relay is
okay.
Frame Relay Discovery is
Change the DLCI Type for each
network DLCI from Multiplexed to
Standard, turning off
DLCI and PVC
configuration.
multiplexing.
The equipment at the other
end is not frame relay
RFC 1490-compliant.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
ATM Problems
Table 8-3. ATM Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
OCD events; loss of
cell delineation.
Line impairments.
Check Hotwire GranDSLAM
statistics. Reduce the link rate.
ATM statistics show
VCs receiving no data. or not configured in the
VC improperly configured
Check Hotwire GranDSLAM
statistics. Configure the VC.
Hotwire GranDSLAM.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Frame Relay PVC Problems
Table 8-4. Frame Relay PVC Problems
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solutions
No receipt or
transmission of data
Cross Connection of the
DLCIs are configured
incorrectly.
Verify the PVC connections
and DLCIs by checking the
network-discovered DLCIs on
the LMI Reported DLCIs screen.
DLCI is inactive on the
frame relay network.
H Verify that the DLCI(s) is
active on the LMI Reported
DLCIs screen. If the DLCI(s) is
not active, contact the service
provider.
H Verify the LMI Reported DLCI
field on the Interface Status
screen.
DTE is configured
incorrectly.
Check the DTE’s configuration.
LMI is not configured
properly for the DTE or
network.
Configure LMI characteristics to
match those of the DTE or
network.
LMI link is inactive.
Verify that the LMI link is active
on the network; the Status Msg
Received counter on the Network
Frame Relay Performance
Statistics screen increments.
Losing Data
Out of Sync
Frame relay network is
experiencing problems.
Run PVC Loopback and Pattern
tests to isolate the problem, then
contact the service provider.
If Monitor Pattern was
selected, it means the test
pattern generator and
receiver have not yet
synchronized.
H Verify that the unit at the
other end is configured to
Send Pattern.
Correct unit configurations.
H Correct the CIR setting so
both units are configured the
same.
CIR settings for the units at
each end are mismatched.
If the message persists, it
means that 5 packets out of
25 are missing or are out of
sequence.
H Check the line’s error rate –
the physical line quality.
Contact the service provider.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Tests Available
The following tests are available to a FrameSaver DSL unit.
Test Menu Example
main/test
9783
Device Name: Node A
05/13/2000 08:02
TEST
Network PVC Tests
Data Port PVC Tests
Data Port Physical Tests
IP Ping
Lamp Test
Abort All Tests
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit
Network and Data Port PVC Tests do not appear on the menu when no PVCs
have been configured on the interface. Check that both ends of the cables are
properly seated and secured.
Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane SLM system using its enhanced
Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface, as well as from the menu-driven
user interface.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Test Timeout Feature
A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test (as opposed
to manually terminating a test) after it has been running a specified period of
time.
It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is
remotely managed through an inband data stream (PVC). If a test is accidently
commanded to execute on the interface providing management access, control is
regained when the specified time period expires, automatically terminating the
test.
To use this feature, enable the Test Timeout configuration option, and set a
duration for the test to run in the Test Duration (min) configuration option (see
Configuring General System Options in Chapter 4, Configuration Options).
NOTE:
These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE,
like a DTE-initiated External Loopback.
Starting and Stopping a Test
Use this procedure to start, monitor, or abort specific tests. To abort all active
tests on all interfaces, see Aborting All Tests.
When the status of a test is . . .
The only command available is . . .
Inactive
Active
Start
Stop
Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
" Procedure
To start and stop a loopback or a set-pattern test:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test
2. Select an interface and test (e.g., Network or Data Port PVC Tests) and
press Enter.
The selected test screen appears. Startappears in the Command column.
Inactiveappears in the Status column.
3. Select the Port number and press Enter.
4. Select the DLCI number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected.
The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available
test. Startis highlighted.
5. Highlight the Start command for the test you want to start and press Enter.
Stopnow appears and is highlighted, and the status of the test changes to
Active.
6. Press Enter to stop the test.
Startreappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive.
7. View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column.
Aborting All Tests
Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on
all interfaces, with exception to DTE-initiated loopbacks. To abort individual tests
that are active, see Starting and Stopping a Test.
" Procedure
To abort all tests on all interfaces:
1. Follow this menu selection sequence:
Main Menu → Test
2. Select Abort All Tests and press Enter.
Command Completeappears when all tests on all interfaces have been
stopped.
NOTE:
Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE-initiated loopbacks.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
PVC Tests
PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface. The
FrameSaver unit must be operating in frame relay mode.
H
When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices,
they are nondisruptive to data, so user data can continue to be sent during a
test.
H
If the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device, PVC tests
are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data. Also, the Connectivity test
would not appear.
Loopback, and send/monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the
selected DLCI. FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit. If a
PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit, the other end can send and
monitor pattern tests.
The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with the
multiplexed DLCI 550 selected. If a standard DLCI was selected, (Disruptive),
rather than (Non-Disruptive), would be displayed after Test. Also, the
Connectivity test would not appear.
PVC Tests Screen Example
main/test/network_pvc
Device Name: Node A
9783
05/13/2000 08:03
NETWORK PVC TESTS
DLCI Number: 550
Test (Non-Disruptive)
Command
Status
Result
PVC Loopback:
Send Pattern:
Monitor Pattern:
Start
Start
Start
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
0:00:00
0:00:00
0:00:00
Sequence Errors 99999+
Data Errors 99999+
RndTrip Time(ms) 99999
Connectivity:
Start
Inactive
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Ctrl-a to access these functions, ESC for previous menu
MainMenu
Exit
NOTE:
Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs
in the two FrameSaver units. If errors are detected, verify the CIR
configuration and retest.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
PVC Loopback
The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per-PVC
basis. This test logically (not physically) loops back frames received from another
FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device.
Main Menu → Test → Network PVC Tests
Network PVC Loopback
DTE
PVC #x
Network
PVC #x
98-16186
Main Menu → Test → Data Port PVC Tests
Port PVC Loopback
DTE
PVC #x
Network
PVC #x
98-16187
Send Pattern
This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.
To send a pattern test on a link:
Main Menu → Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests]
If the selected
DLCI is configured as . . .
And the default
Rate (kbps) setting is . . .
Then . . .
Standard
(Disruptive)appears
after Test
100% of CIR
10% of CIR
Multiplexed
(Non-Disruptive)
appears after Test
If the CIR is zero, the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Monitor Pattern
This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence
number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device.
To monitor a pattern test on a link:
Main Menu → Test → [Network PVC Tests/Data Port PVC Tests]
The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result
column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync. An Out of Syncmessage
appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence.
These error counts are updated every second. If the maximum count is reached,
99999+appears in these fields.
Connectivity
Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver
device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active. This test stops
automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs.
To run a connectivity test on a link:
Main Menu → Test → Network PVC Tests
Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of
the PVC. A RndTrip Time(ms)message appears in the Result column when a
response is received within 5 seconds, indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the
remote end is alive (operational and connected), and the round trip (RT) time is
shown in milliseconds (ms), with a resolution of 1 ms. If a response is not
received within 5 seconds, No Responseappears in the Result column.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
DTE Loopback
The local DTE external Loopback (DTLB) test loops the received signal on the
DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining
ports. Use this test to isolate problems on the user data port.
Main Menu → Test → Data Port Physical Tests
An attached device or test equipment must generate the data to be looped back.
User
Network
Data DTLB
Port
Port
99-16284
CAUTION:
This test may affect the operation of the frame relay PVCs assigned
to the port. Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be
disrupted.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
IP Ping Test
An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and
any FrameSaver unit, router, or NMS to which it has a route. In addition, the test
can be run to access a remote unit for configuration purposes.
Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are:
H
To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit
in the network to verify that the path is operational. Select Procedure 1 to
ping any far-end FrameSaver unit.
H
To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver
unit and the central site NMS. During a remote site installation, an IP Ping
test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site.
The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured,
and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS. Select
Procedure 2 to ping the NMS at the central site.
H
To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central
site FrameSaver unit. The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the
SNMP trap managers to be sent the Ping. Select Procedure 2 to ping the
SNMP trap managers.
" Procedure 1
To ping any far-end FrameSaver unit:
1. Select the IP Ping test.
Main Menu → Test → IP Ping
2. Enter the IP Address of the device the Ping is being sent to, then select Start.
NOTE:
If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized, or the far-end unit has just
initialized, it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via
the proprietary RIP.
If accessing the unit remotely to enter or change frame relay parameters,
send the Ping five times in a row, in rapid succession; the unit will be
operating in frame relay mode.
3. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.
— While the test is running, In Progress... appears in the Status field.
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
" Procedure 2
To ping the NMS at the central site:
1. Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address in its
routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.
2. Verify that the central site NMS’s router has the FrameSaver unit’s IP address
in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit.
3. Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap
Manager if the router is to route data, so a route has been configured within
the FrameSaver unit.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
SNMP Traps
Or, for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router,
verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured.
Main Menu → Configuration → Management and Communication →
Node IP → Default IP Destination
Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC
Multiplexing is used, as when using the Auto-Configuration feature.
4. Select the IP Ping test.
Main Menu → Test → IP Ping
5. Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS, then select Start.
6. Verify the results of the IP Ping test.
— While the test is running, In Progress... appears in the Status field.
— When the test is finished, Alive. Latency = nn msshould appear
as the Status (nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds).
If any other message is displayed, additional testing will be required.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Lamp Test
The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and
functioning properly. All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every 1/2
second during execution of the test. When the test is stopped, the LEDs are
restored to their normal condition.
Main Menu → Test → Lamp Test
If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set, the
Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires. See Test Timeout Feature for
additional information.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up OpenLane for
FrameSaver Devices
9
This chapter includes:
H
H
H
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System
Setting Up FrameSaver and SLV Support
OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices
The OpenLane Service Level Management (SLM) system provides the following
features:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Web and database services
Web access to health and status information
Web access to real-time, as well as historical graphs and reports
Web access to SLV reports, for units with the SLV feature set activated.
On-demand polling of FrameSaver devices
SNMP polling and reporting
Web-based diagnostic tests: end-to-end, PVC loopbacks, connectivity, and
physical interface tests
H
H
Basic device configuration, including RMON alarm and threshold
configuration when the unit has the advanced SLV feature set activated
Automatic device and PVC discovery for SLV devices with their SLV Delivery
Ratio configuration option enabled
H
H
Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network
Remote SLV feature activation
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices
H
H
Device reset capability
HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web
interface
The advanced SLV feature set may be activated, depending upon the model
ordered; or, it can be activated when SLV functionality is needed using the
OpenLane SLM system.
To activate SLV functionality at a later time, order an Activation Certificate
(Feature No. 9783-C1-220).
Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System
Instructions for installing the OpenLane SLM system are found in the following
documents:
H
H
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for UNIX
Quick Start Installation Instructions
OpenLane 5.x Service Level Management for Windows NT
Quick Start Installation Instructions
See Product-Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers.
Select the appropriate document.
In addition to installation instructions, these documents include instructions for:
H
H
H
H
Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services.
Accessing the OpenLane application.
Adding a FrameSaver device.
Adding a Customer ID.
The OpenLane SLM system has an extensive Help system. For additional
information refer to the following sources:
H
H
For UNIX users – Refer to the readme.txt file for distributed infrastructure
details, and the online Help for operational details.
For Windows NT users – Refer to the online Help.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices
Setting Up FrameSaver and SLV Support
With the OpenLane SLM system’s extensive online Help system, the application
is self-documenting and you have access to the most current system information.
" Procedure
To set up FrameSaver and SLV support:
1. Start the OpenLane services, then access the application.
2. Enter a Customer ID of Admin for access to customer profiles, frame relay
access facilities components, and PVC components.
3. Add FrameSaver devices.
4. Create customer profiles.
5. Set up historical data collection.
6. Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data for FrameSaver units
with the SLV feature set activated.
See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps
and for additional information.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices
This page intentionally left blank.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for
FrameSaver Devices
10
FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication’s Network Health
software.
For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set, Network
Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate
FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package (see
the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 10-10). To get this report, you need
Network Health R4.01 or higher.
This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver
DSL devices. It includes the following:
H
H
H
H
H
Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports
Discovering FrameSaver Elements
Configuring the Discovered Elements
Grouping Elements for Reports
Generating Reports for a Group
— About Service Level Reports
— About At-a-Glance Reports
— About Trend Reports
— Printed Reports
H
Reports Applicable to FrameSaver SLV Devices
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
For additional information about installing, accessing, and managing FrameSaver
DSL devices through Concord’s Network Health, and for information about
applicable reports, refer to:
H
H
H
Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application.
Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application.
Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay
reports.
H
Network Health – Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand
and use Traffic Accountant reports.
Installation and Setup of Network Health
Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions, and
follow the instructions applicable to your network platform. Once Network Health
is installed, you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units.
Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions, called a
module. Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those
features and functions. Make sure you license the Poller application so you can
poll units and collect data.
To use this application:
1. Discover network elements, units, and interfaces in the network.
2. Configure the Network Health applications, then save them.
3. Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes.
4. Set up and run reports.
Setup and operation information is contained in the Network Health User Guide.
The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once
you have access to the applications.
See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup
information and a full discussion of the application’s features and how to use
them.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Discovering FrameSaver Elements
Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications, the Discover
dialog box opens. Use this dialog box to search for FrameSaver units in your
network and discover their DLCIs. Saving the results of the search creates
definitions in the Poller Configuration, which are used to poll the units.
IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be
entered for Network Health to find the FrameSaver units on the network and
discover their elements. These elements are resources that can be polled
(e.g., LAN/WAN interfaces, frame relay circuits, routers, and servers).
The two types of elements that can be polled are:
H
H
Statistics elements – Provide counters and other gauges for information
gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis.
Conversation elements – Provide RMON2 and similar data for information
gathered about network traffic between nodes.
" Procedure
To find FrameSaver device elements in your network:
1. Select the LAN/WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found.
Network Health treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type.
2. Enter the IP Addresses of the FrameSaver units to be located, and the
Community String (Community Name in the FrameSaver unit). The
Community String is case-sensitive.
3. Select the Discover button.
The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens,
showing the results of the discovery process.
A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of
existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete.
Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network, it
could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all
elements in the network.
See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional
information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to
the database.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Configuring the Discovered Elements
Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for
the first time. For a FrameSaver DSL unit, the speed set would be the unit’s CIR.
No additional configuration should be required. However, you should verify that all
appropriate information has been retrieved.
NOTE:
If a FrameSaver unit does not have CIR configured, or if it is not configured
correctly, Network Health sets the unit’s CIR to 0 kbps. For this reason, you
should reconfigure the unit’s CIR before Network Health polls it. If 0 kbps is
the speed setting, you will need to edit the unit’s CIR from Network Health.
Additional information that can be edited, as well. See Discovering Elements in
the Network Health User Guide for additional information.
" Procedure
To change the CIR for FrameSaver DSL unit elements from Network Health:
1. Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering
dialog box once the discovery process is completed.
The Poller Configuration window opens.
2. Double-click on the first element discovered. The Modify Element dialog box
opens.
3. In the Speed box, select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the
unit in the text box.
Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts (e.g., enter 56 k for 56 kilobits
per second, or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second).
4. Apply your changes:
— Select the Apply/Next button to save your change and bring up the next
element to be edited. Continue until all newly discovered frame relay
elements have been modified before selecting the OK button.
— Select the the OK button.
The Modify Element dialog box closes.
5. Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window. The
modified elements are saved to the database, and the units are polled.
Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for
data to be gathered before running any reports.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Grouping Elements for Reports
Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made, the
newly discovered elements (DLCIs) should be organized into a group for Health
reporting. Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node
types (e.g., all FrameSaver and SLV elements). Once grouped, you can then run
reports on all DLCIs in the network, as well as reports on individual DLCIs.
" Procedure
To group elements:
1. From the console, select Edit Groups from the Reports menu. The Add
Groups dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name in the Group Name field. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
A through Z, a through z, 0 through 9, dashes (–), periods (.), and underscores
(_ ) can be used. No spaces can be included, and the word All cannot be used.
3. Select the WAN radio button (above the Available Elements list).
4. Highlight all the DLCIs listed on the Available Elements list, or select specific
DLCIs, then select the left arrow button.
The highlighted DLCIs move from the Available Elements list to the
Group Members list.
5. Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the
Group Members list.
The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on
the Groups dialog box.
See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for
additional information. That chapter also tells you how to customize reports.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
Generating Reports for a Group
Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCIs
and the DLCIs have been grouped, you can start generating reports. When
selecting a report Section, select WAN from the drop-down list. See Running
Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional
information. That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report
generation.
NOTE:
Network Health provides information with each chart or table, generally
referred to as a report. Click on the hyperlink (Explanation of...) for an
explanation of the report and its features. You can also refer to the Network
Health Reports Guide.
About Service Level Reports
For long-term analysis and reporting, you will want to license the Service Level
Reports application. This application analyzes data collected over months, or by
quarters, and provides service level information about an enterprise, a region,
department, or business process. Executive, IT Manager, and Customer Service
Level reports are provided.
Using these reports, you can measure service performance against goals and
agreements. Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables:
availability, bandwidth, bytes, health exceptions, and latency. These ranges need
to be set before reports are scheduled.
About At-a-Glance Reports
At-a-Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI and network
performance indicators onto a single page. Up to ten DLCIs can be included in an
At-a-Glance Report.
For FrameSaver units with the SLV and SLM reporting feature set, using the
FrameSaver SLV report on page 10-10, you can compare a DLCI’s volume with
the network’s performance over a specified period of time. Ranges for service
level goals can be set for up to five variables: availability, bandwidth, bytes, health
exceptions, and latency. These ranges need to be set before reports are
scheduled. In addition, all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV
enhanced device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the
health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer’s utilization
on network efficiency.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
About Trend Reports
By specifying specific variables like bandwidth, trend analysis can be performed
and shown on Trend Reports. Up to ten variables for a DLCI, or ten DLCIs on one
variable can be generated on a single trend report. Information can be presented
in a line graph, pie chart, bar chart, or table format. Any amount of time can be
specified for the reporting period.
These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health
Index rating. See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index
ratings.
Printed Reports
All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports.
Reports Applicable to FrameSaver SLV Devices
The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver units:
H
Exception Reports – Provide summary and detail information that identifies
DLCIs with the highest incidence of errors, high bandwidth utilization, and
trends.
These reports identify those DLCIs that have exceeded a specified number of
accumulated exception points. It is a good idea to run this report daily so that
DLCIs having the most problems can be attended to first. DLCIs contained on
this report need immediate attention.
If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports, check whether any new
equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly
configured. If its configuration is correct, the equipment could be faulty.
H
Summary Reports – Provide summary information for the network, volume
and error leaders, and DLCI traffic.
— Network Summary Report – Provides an overall view of the network.
Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into
problems.
— Leaders Summary Report – Identifies DLCIs having the highest volume
and errors. High traffic volume may be increasing latency, and the high
Health Index rating indicates problems. It is a good idea to run these
reports daily so a norm can be established. The same DLCIs should
appear.
Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems. Problems to
look for include: a normally high-volume DLCI is dropped from the list, a
new DLCI appears on the list (check Element Summaries), a DLCI has a
high Health Index rating, but low volume, significant differences between
a DLCI’s average and peak Health Index rating.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
— Elements Summary Report – Compares DLCI traffic with volume and
the baseline, bandwidth utilization, and errors.
Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison, to identify
DLCIs with above or below average volume so they can be investigated
when there are any significant changes.
H
H
Supplemental Report – Shows DLCI availability and latency. The
information shown in this report is also on other Health reports. However,
these charts show more than ten DLCIs at a time so you have a broader view
of the service provided by the network.
Service Level Reports – Provide summary information for a group list for a
longer reporting period than other reports.
— Executive Service Level Report – Provides service level performance
for an enterprise on a single page. Use this report to assess whether IT
service levels are meeting availability and service goals.
— IT Manager Service Level Report – Provides service level information
for various groups. Using this report, you can compare service level
performance of various groups. The report summarizes service levels for
a group of DLCIs, along with details on individual DLCIs within that
group.
— Customer Service Level Report – Provides service level information for
customers. This report is used to provide service level information to
service customers to help them determine optimum service levels
needed based upon their own traffic data, as well as provide documented
evidence for increasing CIR. It combines daily volume, daily Health
exceptions, bandwidth distribution, average Health Index ratings and
availability for each DLCI onto a single page.
H
At-a-Glance Reports – Provides consolidated DLCI and network
performance information onto a single page.
— At-a-Glance Report – Consolidates bandwidth utilization, network traffic,
events occurring over the reporting period, and availability and latency
levels information. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a
trend report (e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be
generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions
Reports, Supplemental Reports, and Health reports.
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high
Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem
leading to a DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
— FrameSaver SLV Plus At-a-Glance Report – For FrameSaver units with
the SLV and SLM reporting feature set, performs trend analysis on up to
ten specified variables for DLCIs. This is the first Network Health report to
integrate the FrameSaver SLV unit’s unique monitoring capabilities, using
the unit’s SLV-advanced network statistics.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices
H
Trend Reports – Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for
DLCIs. Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report
(e.g., burst octets), but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when
investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports, Supplemental
Reports, and Health reports.
Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCIs having a high Health
Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a
DLCI’s poor Health Index rating.
See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
10-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Hierarchy
Menu Hierarchy – Frame Relay Mode
MAIN MENU
Status
Status
Test
System and Test Status
PVC Connection Status
Network Interface Status
IP Routing Table
Performance Statistics
Trap Event Log
Configuration
Control
Easy Install
Display LEDs
and Control Leads
Identity
System and
Test Status
PVC Connection Network
Status
Interface Status
Identity
Trap Event
Log
Performance
Statistics
IP Routing
Table
• System
• NAM
• Self-Test Results • Source Link,
• Last System
Reset
• Health and
Status
• Test Status
• Operating Rate
• Receiver Attenuation
• SNR Margin
• Number of
Trap Events
• Time Elapsed
Since Event
• Service Level
Verification
• DLCI
• Frame Relay
• ATM
• Ethernet
• Destination
• Mask
• Gateway
• Hop
• Type
• Interface
• TTL
DLCI, EDLCI
• Primary
Destination Link,
DLCI, EDLCI,
Status
• Event
• Clear All Statistics
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Test
Configuration
Control
Easy Install
PVC Tests:
Network
Data Port
Physical Tests:
Network
PVC Tests
Data Port
Other:
IP Ping
Lamp Test
Abort All Tests
(DLCI Number)
Physical Tests
• PVC Loopback
• Send Pattern
• Monitor Pattern
• Connectivity
• Local Loopbacks
• Remote Loopbacks
• Send/Monitor Pattern Tests
MAIN MENU
Status
Load
Configuration
from:
Test
Configuration
Edit/Display
Configuration
Control
Easy Install
System
Network
Data Ports
PVC Connections
Management and
Communication
Network and
Data Ports
PVC Connection
Table
System
Management and
Communication Options
• Frame Relay
and LMI
• Service Level
Verification
• Physical
• Source Link, DLCI,
EDLCI
• Primary Destination
Link, DLCI,
• Node IP
• Frame Relay
• ATM (Network Only)
• DLCI Records
• Management PVCs
• General SNMP Management
• Telnet and FTP Session
• SNMP NMS Security
• SNMP Traps
• General
EDLCI
New or Modify
Management
PVC Entry
• Ethernet Port
• Communication Port
• External Modem (Com Port)
New or Modify
PVC Connection Entry
00-16771a
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Hierarchy
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Easy Install
Control
System Information
Administer Logins
Change Operating Mode
Select Software Release
LMI Packet Capture Utility
Clear Device Fail
Reset Device
System Information
Administer Logins
Select Software Release
LMI Packet Capture Utility
• Device Name
• System Name,
Location, Contact
• Login ID
• Password
• Access Level
• Current Release
• Alternate Release
• Switch & Reset
• Capture Interface
• Packet Capture Start/Stop
• Status
• Date
• Time
• Packets in Buffer
• Display LMI Trace Log
New
LMI Trace Log
Login Entry
MAIN MENU
Status
Test
Configuration
Control
Easy Install
Easy Install
• Node IP Address and Subnet Mask
• TS Access
• Create Dedicated Network Management Link
• Ethernet Port Options Screen
• DSL Line Rate
00-16771b
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Hierarchy
This page intentionally left blank.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and
RMON Alarm Defaults
B
This appendix contains the following:
H
H
H
MIB Support
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps
System Group (mib-2)
— FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)
— FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)
Interfaces Group (mib-2)
H
H
— Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
— NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps
— Trap: warmStart
— Trap: authenticationFailure
— Traps: linkUp and linkDown
— Traps: enterprise-Specific
— Traps: RMON-Specific
H
H
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults
— Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
— Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults
— DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
MIB Support
The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1, and has the capability of
being managed by any industry-standard SNMP manager and accessed by
external SNMP managers using the SNMP protocol.
The following MIBs are supported:
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
MIB II (RFC 1213 and RFC 1573)
Frame Relay DTEs MIB (RFC 2115)
RS-232-Like MIB (RFC 1659)
Frame Relay Service MIB (RFC 1604)
Enterprise MIB
RMON Version 1 MIB (RFC 1757)
RMON Version 2 MIB (RFC 2021)
Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps
Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World
Wide Web site.
" Procedure
To access Paradyne MIBs:
1. Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www.paradyne.com.
2. Select Technical Support.
3. Select Management Information Base (MIBs).
The download procedure may vary depending upon your browser or NMS
application software. Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional
download information.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
System Group (mib-2)
This section provides the system description and system object identifier for the
System Group for the FrameSaver DSL unit, which is an SNMPv1 MIB.
FrameSaver Unit’s sysDescr (system 1)
The following is the system description (sysDescr [system 1]) for the NMS
subsystem in the FrameSaver DSL unit:
PARADYNE DSL FrameSaver Flex; Model: 9783; S/W Release: (MM.mm.bb
[MM=Major.mm=minor.bb=build] format); NAM CCA number: (hardware
version in hhhh-hhh format); Serial number: sssssss
FrameSaver Unit’s sysObjectID (system 2)
The following is the system object identifier (sysObjectID [system 2]), or OID, for
the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver DSL unit:
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.9.1.1 for the basic feature set, or
1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.9.1.2 for the advanced SLV feature set.
NOTE:
The sysObjectID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.1.14.2.4.9.1.1 (basic) until the advanced
SLV feature set is activated using the OpenLane SLM system.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Interfaces Group (mib-2)
Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group, as defined in RFC 1573 and
RFC 1213, which is an SNMPv1 MIB, is provided in this section.
Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
The following table provides the ifName for each interface type, the ifDescr, and
the ifIndex that Paradyne has assigned to each.
Table B-1. Paradyne Interface Objects Information
ifName
Description
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
Physical Layer
Network SDSL DSL network interface Network SDSL; DSL FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
101020001
101006001
Ethernet
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port; DSL FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
Sync Data Port Synchronous Data
Synchronous Data Port, Slot: 1, 101003001
Port: 1; DSL FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
S01P1
COM
Port-1
Communications port
COM Port; DSL FR NAM;
Hardware Version: hhhh-hhh
101004001
101023001
Frame Relay Logical Layer
FR UNI Frame relay logical
For the DTE side:
link on the DSL
network interface
Network SDSL of FR DTE;
DSL FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
For the DCE side:
Network SDSL of FR SERVICE;
DSL FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
Frame relay logical
link on the
Synchronous Data
Port-1
101016001
For the user side:
Synchronous Data Port of
FR DTE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;
DSL FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
For the network side:
Synchronous Data Port of
FR SERVICE, Slot: 1, Port: 1;
DSL FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table (ifTable)
For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with
NetScout Probes, use the following ifName, ifDescr, and ifIndex.
Table B-2. NetScout Interface Objects Information
ifName
Description
ifDescr (ifEntry 2)
ifIndex
Frame Relay Logical Layer
Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical
1
For the DTE side:
Network
link on the network
interface
RMON (IN/OUT); Network
SDSL of FR DTE;
DSL FR NAM; Hardware
Version: hhhh-hhh
For the DCE side:
RMON (IN/OUT); Network
SDSL of FR SERVICE; DSL FR
NAM; Hardware Version:
hhhh-hhh
RMON Logical Layer
RMON Virtual
Interfaces
These values are
ALL – VIRTUAL PVC
[interface number]
[DLCI number] ALL
65 –
100000000
calculated based on
the probe’s internal
circuit index: circuit
index +65.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps
This section describes the FrameSaver unit’s compliance with SNMP format
standards and with its special operational trap features.
All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap.
Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing $ifString have the
following format:
‘DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” of $ifName frame relay link “$linkName”.’
— $dlciNumber is the DLCI number. DLCI $dlciNumber “$circuitId” only
appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap.
— $circuitId is the name given to the circuit. It can be an empty string, or a
1– 64 byte string within quotes (e.g., “Chicago to New York”), and only
appears when a DLCI with “circuitID” is associated with the trap.
— $linkName is the name given to the link. Frame relay $linkName only
appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with
the trap.
— $ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable.
Examples:
‘DLCI 100 “Chicago to New York” of Network DSL frame relay link’
In this example, a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap.
Typically, the $circuitId is a coded string encoded by the network service
provider. The following shows an example.
‘DLCI 100 “cc0402–dec0704.RG21” of Network DSL frame relay link’
The unit supports the following traps:
H
H
H
H
H
warmStart
authenticationFailure
linkUp and linkDown
enterprise-Specific
RMON-Specific
These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Trap: warmStart
This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized.
Table B-3. warmStart Trap
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
warmStart
H Reset command sent.
H Power disruption.
FrameSaver unit has just
reinitialized and stabilized
itself.
String:
‘Unit reset.’
Variable-Binding
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)
Trap: authenticationFailure
This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to
lack of authentication.
Table B-4. authenticationFailure Trap
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
authenticationFailure
Access to the FrameSaver
unit was attempted and
failed.
H SNMP protocol message not
properly authenticated.
H Three unsuccessful attempts
were made to enter a correct
login user ID/password
combination.
H IP Address security is enabled
and a message was received
from the SNMP Manager
whose address was not on the
lost of approved managers.
String:
‘Unauthorized access attempted.’
Variable-Binding
devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.mib)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: linkUp and linkDown
These traps are supported on the following interfaces:
H
H
Physical sublayer interfaces: network, Ethernet, and synchronous data ports
Frame relay logical link layer interfaces
Table B-5. linkUp and linkDown Traps
Trap
What It Indicates
Possible Cause
linkDown
A failure in one of the
communication interfaces
has occurred.
A failure in one of the
communication interfaces has
occurred.
linkUp
One of the failed
communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational.
One of the failed communication
up and operational.
Their linkUp and linkDown variable-bindings are in Table B-6.
Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II
Interfaces Table. It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension
MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (1 of 3)
Interface
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
Physical Sublayer
Network
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
interface.
(Supported by an
entry in the MIB-II
interfaces table.)
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
– Loss of Signal (LOS)
– Loss of Frame (LOF)
– Loss of Link (LOL)
– Loss of Signal Quality
– LPR Events
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Sample strings:
‘Network DSL down due to
LOS, LOF, and LOL.’
‘Network DSL down due to
Loss of Signal Quality.’
H linkUp – No alarms on the
interface.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
Synchronous
Data Port
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
port.
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
Alarm conditions include:
(Supported by the
media-specific
RS232-like MIB.)
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
1
– DTR off
2
– RTS off
– ‘’ – Not DTR or RTS, but
link is down.
String:
‘$ifString $alarmString down.’
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1
DTR and RTS down.’)
‘$ifString administratively shut
down.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
H linkUp – No alarms on the
port.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
1
The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the DTR lead state.
2
The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp/linkDown trap if the DTE
supports the RTS lead state.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (2 of 3)
Interface
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
Physical Sublayer (cont’d)
Ethernet Port
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – Communication is
not possible over the Ethernet
port.
H ifAdminStatus
(RFC 1573)
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
‘$ifString administratively shut
down.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
H linkUp – Communication on
the port is restored.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
Logical Link Sublayer
Synchronous
Data Port
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – LMI is down for the
3
LMI Protocol configured, or
H ifAdminStatus
Frame Relay link is disabled.
(RFC 1573)
‘$ifString LMI down.’ No
alarms exist on the link.
(e.g., ‘Sync Data Port S01P1
frame relay link “Port-1”
LMI down.’)
Service Side of the
Frame Relay UNI
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
(Supported by the
media-specific Frame
Relay Services MIB.)
‘$ifString administratively shut
down.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
H linkUp – LMI is up or Frame
Relay link is enabled.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
Network
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – LMI is down for the
3
LMI Protocol configured, or
H ifAdminStatus
Frame Relay link is disabled.
DTE Side of the
Frame Relay UNI
(RFC 1573)
Strings:
‘$ifString LMI down.’
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
(Supported by the
media-specific Frame
Relay DTE’s MIB.)
‘$ifString administratively shut
down.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
H linkUp – LMI is up or Frame
Relay link is enabled.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
3
If the LMI Protocol is not configured, a linkUp/linkDown trap is based solely upon
whether the interface is enabled or disabled.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-6. linkUp and linkDown Variable-Bindings (3 of 3)
Interface
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
ATM Logical Link Sublayer
Network
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H linkDown – One or more alarm
conditions are active on the
link.
H ifAdminStatus
(Supported by an
entry in the MIB-II
interfaces table.)
(RFC 1573)
Alarm condition:
H ifOperStatus (RFC 1573)
Loss of Cell Delineation
–
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
String:
‘$ifString down.’ (The physical
link is down.)
‘$ifString down due to Loss of
Cell Delineation.’
‘$ifString administratively shut
down.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
H linkUp – No alarms on the link.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: enterprise-Specific
These traps indicate that an enterprise-specific event has occurred. Supported
enterprise-specific traps are listed below.
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (1 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
enterpriseCIR-
Change(15)
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex
CIR has changed due to the LMI
report. LMI Protocol is set to
Standard and the network’s CIR
changed.
(devFrExt.mib)
H devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
String:
H devFrExtDlciCIR
‘CIR on $ifString changed to
$CIR bps.’
(devFrExt.mib)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
enterpriseConfig-
Change(6)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Configuration has been changed
via the menu-driven user
interface, an SNMP Manager,
or auto-configuration after 60
seconds has elapsed without
another change.
String:
‘Device configuration change.’
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex
enterpriseDLCI-
delete(17)
The DLCI has been deleted. The
network no longer supports the
DLCI, and it was removed.
(devFrExt.mib)
H devFrExtDlciDlci
(devFrExt.mib)
Strings:
‘$ifString deleted by Auto-DLCI
delete.’
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib.)
enterpriseDLCI-
Down(11)
DLCI Status is set to Inactive; the
DLCI is down.
Strings:
‘$ifString down.’ (Due to LMI or
physical failure.)
‘$ifString administratively
shutdown.’ (Due to an intentional
shutdown.)
enterpriseDLCIUp(12)
DLCI Status is set to Active;
DLCI is up again.
String:
‘$ifString up.’
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (2 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex
enterpriseMissedSLV-
Down(16)
SLV Timeout Error Event
Threshold has been exceeded.
(devFrExt.mib)
H devFrExtDlciDlci
String:
(devFrExt.mib)
‘SLV down on $ifString due to
excessive SLV packet loss. Total
SLV packets lost is $numLost.’
H devFrExtDlciMissed-
SLVs (devFrExt.mib)
enterpriseMissedSLV-
Up(116)
SLV Timeout Error Event has
been cleared.
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib.)
String:
‘SLV up on $ifString because
SLV communication was
reestablished. Total SLV packets
lost is $numLost.’
enterpriseRMON-
ResetToDefault(13)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
All RMON-related option
changes have been reset to their
default values.
Default Factory Configuration
settings have been reloaded,
returning RMON-related options
to their original settings.
String:
‘RMON database reset to
defaults.’
enterpriseSelfTest-
Fail(2)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
Unit has completed
(re)initialization and a hardware
failure was detected.
String:
‘Self test failed: $s.’ ($s is the
contents of devSelfTestResult.)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-7. enterprise-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings (3 of 3)
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
For physical interfaces and
frame relay links:
enterpriseTest-
Start(5)
At least one test has been
started on an interface or virtual
circuit.
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H .0.0 (placeholder)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
String:
‘$testString test started on
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘DTE Loopback
test started on Sync Data Port
S01P1.’)
For virtual circuits (DLCIs):
enterpriseTest-
Stop(105)
All tests have been halted on an
interface or virtual circuit.
H devFrExtDlciIfIndex
(devFrExt.mib)
String:
H devFrExtDlciDlci
‘$testString test stopped on
$ifString.’ (e.g., ‘Disruptive PVC
Loopback test stopped on
DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port
S01P1 frame relay.’)
(devFrExt.mib)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
enterpriseLinkSpeed
Change(14)
H ifIndex (RFC 1573)
H ifSpeed (RFC 1573)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib
The link speed has changed.
String:
’Speed on $ifName changed to
$ifSpeed bps.’
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Traps: RMON-Specific
Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON. See
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate
RMON-specific traps.
Table B-8. RMON-Specific Traps and Variable-Bindings
Trap
Variable-Bindings
Possible Cause
risingAlarm
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)
Object being monitored has risen
above the set threshold.
H alarmVariable
(RFC 1757)
String:
‘Change in $variableName
$typeString threshold of
$alarmRisingThreshold by
$(alarmValue –
H alarmSampleType
(RFC 1757)
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)
H alarmRisingThreshold or
alarm Falling Threshold
(RFC 1757)
AlarmRisingThreshold.’
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
fallingAlarm
H alarmIndex (RFC 1757)
Object being monitored has
fallen below the set threshold.
H alarmVariable
(RFC 1757)
String:
‘Change in $variableName
$typeString threshold of
$alarmFallingThreshold by
$(alarmValue –
H alarmSampleType
(RFC 1757)
H alarmValue (RFC 1757)
AlarmFallingThreshold.’
H alarmFallingThreshold
(RFC 1757)
H devLastTrapString
(devHealthAndStatus.-
mib)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
RMON Alarm and Event Defaults
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap or a log event is sent.
Event Defaults
Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit, there is no
need to define multiple events for each alarm type, so only the following two
events need to be generated:
eventIndex eventDescription
eventType
1
2
Default SLV Rising Event
Default SLV Falling Event
log-and-trap(4)
log-and-trap(4)
The alarm default tables starting on the next page show how each RMON default
alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit, shows the alarm and event types, the
interval used when generating alarms, and thresholds.
H
H
H
H
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area
DLCI Alarm Defaults – NetScout Area
See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps
work, and Traps: RMON-Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring.
Rising Event Operation
If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table (e.g., frames
dropped by the network), the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the
end of the interval. Only one alarm per event per interval is generated. The alarm
condition persists until the event has been disarmed (reset).
The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising
threshold has not been crossed during an interval, allowing the event to return to
its original disarmed state.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver DSL unit’s network interface.
Table B-9. Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults
Rising
Falling
Threshold Threshold
Sample
Type
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Default
Unavailable
Seconds
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: pdnIfExtTotalUASs
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
OID:.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.-
12.1.1.1.4.I
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults
These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit’s frame relay link interfaces. They are
created during RMON initialization.
Table B-10. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (1 of 2)
Sample
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default
Falling
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Type
Invalid Frames
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.18.I
Short Frames
Long Frames
Rx Discards
Tx Discards
D
D
D
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.6.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.7.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.15.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.14.I
Rx Total Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.20.I
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-10. Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults (2 of 2)
Sample
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default
Falling
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Type
Tx Total Errors
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.19.I
Rx Overruns
Tx Underruns
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.28.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTx-
Underruns
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.29.I
Rx Non-octet Aligns
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRx-
NonOctet
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.16.I
Rx CRC Errors
Total LMI Errors
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
1
1
1
1
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.17.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs Rising
(15 mins)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotal-
LMIErrs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.7.1.32.I
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area
These alarms apply to all DLCIs on the network interface and can be created
during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created. They are put into the
Paradyne alarm area.
Table B-11. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (1 of 3)
Rising
Falling
Threshold Threshold
Sample
Type
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Default
Average Latency
A
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg
900 secs
(15 mins)
None
Must be
configured.
0
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
Congested Seconds
Current Latency
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
Rising
5
5
Tag: devFrExtDlciSts-
CongestedSecs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D
A
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
None
Must be
configured.
0
1
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D
DLCI Inactive
Seconds
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
1
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactive-
Secs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
Frames Dropped by
Network
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
Rising
None
1
0
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D
Frames Received
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs
(1 min)
Must be
configured.
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
8.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-11. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (2 of 3)
Sample
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default
Falling
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Type
Frames Sent
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs
(1 min)
None
Must be
configured.
0
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
6.I.D
Missing Latency
Responses
D
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
900 secs
(15 mins)
Rising
Rising
5
1
5
1
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D
Rx BECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs
(1 min)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
5.I.D
Rx DLCI Link
Utilization
D
D
D
D
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs.
(1 min)
Rising
Rising
None
70% of link 65% of link
capability capability
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
9.I.D
Rx FECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs
(1 min)
1
1
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
4.I.D
Tx CIR Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs
(1 min)
Must be
0
configured.
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
7.I.D
Tx DLCI Link
Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB
(RFC 2115)
60 secs.
(1 min)
Rising
70% of link 65% of link
capability capability
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.
7.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-11. DLCI Alarm Defaults – Paradyne Area (3 of 3)
Sample
Rising
Threshold Threshold
Default
Falling
Event
Type
2
1
Item
MIB/Tag/OID
Interval
Default
Type
Tx Frames
Exceeding CIR
D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
60 secs
(1 min)
None
Must be
configured.
0
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.
6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D
1
D = Delta. Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained
in the MIB.
A = Absolute. Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB.
2
I in the OID = Interface ID of the frame relay link.
D = DLCI number.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Object ID Cross-References (Numeric Order)
The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event
information. Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor. When the threshold
set for the monitored variable is exceeded, an SNMP trap is sent and/or a log
entry is made.
This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing
the NetScout Custom History screen (shown below), which provides the OID
instead of the alarm condition.
See Table B-14 for an RMON history OID cross-reference and Table B-15 for an
RMON alarm OID cross-reference.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (1 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.I
Item
MIB/Tag
Link Speed
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag: ifSpeed
All DLCI + LMI Rx Octets
All DLCI + LMI Tx Octets
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag: ifInOctets
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.I
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.I
MIB: MIB II (RFC 1573)
Tag: ifOutOctets
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.10.32.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D
Rx FECNs
Rx BECNs
Tx Frames
Tx Octets
Rx Frames
Rx Octets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I
Rx Non-octet Aligns
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (2 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.3.I.D
DLCI CIR
Tx DEs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciFrCIR
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.7.I .D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.8.I .D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.17.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.18.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.20.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.22.I .D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.37.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.39.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.41.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.43.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.45.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9. 4.1.1.55.I .D
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxDE
Tx BECNs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrCircuitTxBECN
Tx Frames Above CIR
Rx Frames Above CIR
Network Frames Lost
Rx DEs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxFrOutCIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciNetDropFr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciRxDE
Network Frames Offered
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFr
Network Frames Offered
In CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrInCir
Network Frames Dropped
In CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropOffFrInCir
Network Frames Offered
Above CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciRmtOffFrOutCir
Network Frames Lost
Above CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRmtDropFrOutCir
Network Frames Offered
Above CIR Within EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciDropFrCirToEir
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (3 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4 . . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.57.I .D
Network Frames Dropped
Above CIR Within EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-
CirToEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.59.I .D
Network Frames Offered
Above EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciOfferedFrOverEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.61.I .D
Network Frames Dropped
Above EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag:devFrExtDlciRxFrNetDrop-
OverEir
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.63.I .D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.8.I.D
DLCI EIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciEir
Inactive Seconds
Average Latency
Maximum Latency
Latency Packet Size
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyMax
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyPacketSz
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2 . . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N
Frame Size Upper Limit
(1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N
Frame Size Count (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzCount
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (4 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.2.I.D.N
Burst Upper Limit (1–5)
Burst Octets (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtBurstUpLimit
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.3.I.D.N
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtBurstOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.5.2.1.4.I.D.N
Burst Frames (1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtBurstFrames
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.2.I
LMI Unavailable Seconds
Rx Short Frames
Rx Long Frames
LMI Sequence Errors
Rx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkSeqErr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
Total Rx CRC Errors
Rx Illegal Frames
Total Tx Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
Total Rx Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
Total LMI Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-14. History OID Cross-Reference (5 of 5)
1
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.2.I.N
Port Burst Upper Limits 1–4 MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.3.I.N
Rx Port Burst Octets 1–5
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.10.3.1.4.I.N
Tx Port Burst Octets 1–5
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets
1
I = Interface ID of the frame relay link
D = DLCI number
N = Additional numeric index used by tables, like frame or burst size
H = Host control index
P = Protocol index
T = The time mask
See Table B-15 for an RMON alarm OID cross-reference.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (1 of 2)
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1. . .
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.4.I.D
Rx FECNs
Rx BECNs
Frames Sent
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFECNs
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.5.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.7.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.8.I.D
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.32.2.1.9.I.D
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedBECNs
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentFrames
Tx CIR Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
Tx DLCI Link Utilization
Frames Received
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitSentOctets
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedFrames
Rx DLCI Link Utilization
MIB: FR DTE MIB (RFC 2115)
Tag: frCircuitReceivedOctets
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.17.I.D
Tx Frames Exceeding CIR
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.20.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.1.1.23.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.6.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.2.1.2.I.D
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.5.I.D
Frames Dropped by Network MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: frFrExtDlciNetDropFr
Missing Latency Responses MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs
Congested Seconds
Inactive Seconds
Average Latency
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyAvg
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SNMP MIBs and Traps, and RMON Alarm Defaults
Table B-15. Alarm OID Cross-Reference (2 of 2)
Object ID (OID)
Item
MIB/Tag
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4. . .
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.3.1.7.I.D
Current Latency
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLatencyLatest
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.2.I.N
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.4.2.1.3.I.N
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.6.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.7.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.11.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.14.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.15.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.16.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.17.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.18.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.19.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.20.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.28.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.29.I
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1795.2.24.2.6.9.4.7.1.32.I
Frame Size Upper Limits
(1–5)
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit
Frame Size Count (1–5)
Rx Short Frames
Rx Long Frames
LMI Sequence Errors
Tx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtFrameSzCount
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxShort
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxLong
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkSeqErr
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxDiscards
Rx Discards
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
Rx Nonoctet Aligns
Rx CRC Errors
Rx Illegal Frames
Tx Total Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxIlFrames
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs
Rx Total Errors
Rx Overruns
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkRxOverruns
Tx Underruns
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns
Total LMI Errors
MIB: pdn_FrExt.mib (E)
Tag: devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
B-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and
Pin Assignments
C
This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit’s rear panel, and the pin assignments
for the connectors/interfaces and cables.
Rear Panel
The following illustration shows the FrameSaver DSL unit’s rear panel.
ETHERNET
NET
COM
POWER
P
0
R
T
00-16690
The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface.
NOTE:
In the pin assignment tables of this appendix, if the pin number is not shown,
it is not being used.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
DSL Network Interface Cable
The DSL network interface connector is an RJ48C 8-position keyed modular jack.
Table J-1. DSL Network Interface Connector
Pin Number
Signal
(Unused)
(Unused)
Ring
1
2
4
5
8-Pin
Plug
Tip
Pin #8
Pin #1
97-15884
RJ48C
Plug
RJ48C
Plug
Blue
Blue
Twisted Pair
Twisted Pair
Ring
Tip
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
White
White
Orange
White
Orange
White
Ring
Tip
98-15954a
Figure C-1. DSL Network Interface Cable with RJ48C Connector )
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
C-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
COM Port Connector
The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit’s
25-position EIA-232C communication port connector.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
1
Shield (GND)
—
DCE Transmit Data (TXD)
DCE Receive Data (RXD)
DCE Request To Send (RTS)
DCE Clear To Send (CTS)
DCE Data Set Ready (DSR)
Signal Ground (GND)
From DTE (In)
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
—
2
3
4
5 *
6 *
7
DCE Carrier Detect (CD)
DCE Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
* Pins 5, 6, and 8 are tied together.
To DTE (Out)
From DTE (In)
8 *
20
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable
A standard crossover cable can be used to connect the COM port to an
external modem. The external modem must be configured so it is compatible with
the FrameSaver unit. See page C-5 to configure an external modem.
Pin 14
Pin 1
P1
Plug
P2
Plug
Pin 14
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 13
Pin 25
Pin 13
P1
Pin
Pin
P2
Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
1
2
1
TXD
RXD
RTS
TXD
RXD
RTS
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
DSR
DSR
Signal Ground
CD (RLSD)
6
6
Signal Ground
CD (RLSD)
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
RXC
DTR
RXC 17
18
19
DTR 20
21
22
23
XTXC
XTXC 24
25
496-15180
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
C-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
" Procedure
To configure an external modem:
1. Disconnect the asynchronous terminal from the standard cable. See
page C-4 for an illustration of the COM Port connection.
2. Reconnect the crossover cable to the external modem.
3. Enable auto-answer on your modem, and configure it to use the following
LSD, DSR, CTS, RTS, and DTR control leads.
See the table below for AT D0 command strings. Use the following command
string:
AT &C0 &D2 &S0 &R1 \D0 S0=1
AT Command String
To configure the modem to . . .
Force LSD on.
&C0
&D2
&S0
&R1
\D0
Drop the connection when the unit drops DTR.
Force DSR on.
Ignore RTS.
Force CTS on.
S0=1
Automatically answer incoming calls.
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Data Port Connector
The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34-position
V.35 connector to the DTE.
34-Pin
Socket
Signal
ITU CT#
101
Direction
—
Shield
A
B
C
D
E
F
Signal Ground/Common
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Data Set Ready (DSR)
102
—
105
To DSU (In)
From DSU (Out)
From DSU (Out)
From DSU (Out)
106
107
Receive Line Signal Detector
(RLSD or LSD)
109
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Local Loopback (LL)
108/1, /2
141
To DSU (In)
To DSU (In)
To DSU (In)
H
L
Transmit Data (TXD)
103
P (A)
S (B)
Receive Data (RXD)
104
113
115
114
142
From DSU (Out) R (A)
T (B)
Transmit Signal Element Timing –
DTE Source (XTXC or TT)
To DSU (In)
U (A)
W (B)
Receive Signal Element Timing –
DCE Source (RXC)
From DSU (Out) V (A)
X (B)
Transmit Signal Element Timing –
DCE Source (TXC)
From DSU (Out) Y (A)
AA (B)
Test Mode Indicator (TM)
From DSU (Out) NN
Standard V.35 Straight-through Cable
A standard V.35 straight-through cable can be used to connect a DTE port to a
DTE, where a 34-pin plug-type connector is needed for the data port and a
34-position socket-type connector is needed for the DTE. No special-order cables
are required.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
C-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
Ethernet Port Connector
The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit’s
8-position RJ45 Ethernet port unkeyed modular jack.
Signal
Direction
Pin #
10/100BaseT Transmit Data (TD +)
10/100BaseT Transmit Data (TD –)
10/100BaseT Receive Data (RD +)
10/100BaseT Receive Data (RD –)
To LAN Interface (Out)
To LAN Interface (Out)
From LAN Interface (In)
From LAN Interface (In)
1
2
3
6
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectors, Cables, and Pin Assignments
This page intentionally left blank.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
C-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
D
Table D-1. FrameSaver DSL Technical Specifications (1 of 2)
Specification
Criteria
Approvals
FCC Part 15
Safety
Class A digital device
Refer to the equipment’s label for safety information.
Physical Environment
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C)
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
5% to 85% (noncondensing)
Shock and vibration
Withstands normal shipping and handling
Power Consumption and
Dissipation
4.5 watts, 60 Hz $3, 0.135 A at 120 Vac$12
Result: 15.4 Btu per hour
Physical Dimensions
Height (with feet)
Height (without feet)
2.1 inches (5.3 cm)
2.0 inches (5.1 cm)
Width
Depth
6.2 inches (15.7 cm)
8.7 inches (22.1 cm)
Weight
1.38 lbs (0.62 kg)
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Specifications
Table D-1. FrameSaver DSL Technical Specifications (2 of 2)
Specification
Criteria
COM Port
Standard
Data rates
25-position (DB25) connector
EIA-232, V.24 (ISO 2110)
9.6, 14.4, 19.2, 28.8, 38.4, 57.6, and 115.2 kbps
DSL Network Interface
Line Code
8-position modular unkeyed USOC RJ48C jack
2B1Q
Service
SDSL
Data rates
144-2320 kbps
Ethernet Port
Standard
8-position modular unkeyed USOC RJ45 jack
ANSI/IEEE Standard 802.3, Ethernet Version 2
Data rates
10/100 BaseT (auto-sensing 10 and 100 Mbps
Ethernet rates)
Data Port
Standard
Data rates
34-position V.35 connector
V.35/ITU (ISO 2593)
Automatically set to the network rate.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
D-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
E
Equipment
See page E-2 for cables you can order.
Model/Feature
Number
Description
FrameSaver DSL Units
FrameSaver DSL unit with 8 PVCs and Basic Feature Set.
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
9783-A1-211
FrameSaver DSL unit with 8 PVCs and Basic and Advanced SLV 9783-A1-221
Feature Sets.
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver DSL unit with 64 PVCs and Basic Feature Set.
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
9783-A1-213
9783-A1-223
FrameSaver DSL unit with 64 PVCs and Basic and
Advanced SLV Feature Sets.
Includes 1-Slot Housing, 120 Vac Power Supply, Network Cable,
Installation Instructions, and Quick Reference.
FrameSaver SLV Upgrade
FrameSaver DSL SLV Activation Certificate
User Manual
9783-C1-220
FrameSaver DSL 9783 User’s Guide (Paper Manual)
9783-A2-GB20
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Equipment List
Model/Feature
Number
Description
NMS Products
OpenLane Enterprise
7805-D1-001
7805-D1-003
9180
OpenLane Workgroup
NetScout Manager Plus – For UNIX or Windows NT
NetScout Server – For UNIX or Windows NT
NetScout WebCast – For UNIX or Windows NT
Optional Features
9190
9155
Wall Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housing
Shelf Mounting Kit for 1-Slot Housings
9001-F1-891
9001-F1-894
Cables
This table lists cables you can order.
Description
Part Number
Feature Number
RJ48C DSL Network Cable,
035-0209-2031
3100-F1-500
RJ48C-to-RJ48C/RJ49C
(20 feet – 6.1 meters) – For use in the U.S.
Standard EIA-232 Straight-Through Cable, 035-0314-1431
DB25-to-RJ48 (14 feet – 4.3 meters) –
For connection to an asynchronous
terminal or PC with an 8-pin modular
interface.
3100-F2-540
3100-F2-550
Standard EIA-232 Straight-Through Cable, 035-0313-1431
DB25-to-D-Sub9 (14 feet – 4.3 meters) –
For connection to a PC with a D-Sub9
interface.
V.35 DTE Adapter, EIA-530A-to-V.35 –
For connection to equipment with V.35,
MS34 connectors.
035-0244-0031
3100-F1-570
9008-F1-550
Standard EIA-232-D Crossover Cable
(14 feet – 4.3 meters) –
035-0336-1431
For connection to an external device.
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
E-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Numbers
B
A
Access
C
security, 2-1
changing
Character
CIR
ARP
Clearing
ATM
Clock
Invert Transmit, 4-14
Source, Transmit, 4-14
connector, C-3
Committed
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
compatibility, 10-1
Configuration
D
Data
configuring
Delete key, 2-6
DLCI records manually, 4-19
Device
Control
displaying
controlling
on SLV Timeout, 4-10
Number, 4-19
creating
Priority, 4-21
CTS
downloading
guidelines for, 7-2
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
IN-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
DSL
External
DTE
Modem
DTR
F
feature sets
E
field is blank/empty, 2-9
file transfer, 7-2
EIA-232C, COM Port connector, C-3
EIR
Frame Relay
Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier (EDLCI),
Enter (Return) key, 2-6
Enterprise Specific Traps, 4-38
Error Event
G
Esc key, 2-6
Gateway, 6-23
Gateway Address
Ethernet
General
glossary, viii
even parity, 4-42
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
H
L
latency, 1-10
limiting
I
Inactivity Timeout, 4-34, 4-44
installation and setup
Link
interface, user, 2-1
linkUp and linkDown
IP
LMI
and PVC availability, 1-10
Behavior, 4-8
packet utility, 8-5
NMS number, 4-36, 4-37
K
keys
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
IN-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Protocol
O
odd parity, 4-42
PVC
P
availability, 1-10
packet capture
utility, 8-5
total number, 1-9
Parity, 4-42
patents, A
Q
physical
pin assignments
R
Policing, Traffic, 4-8
Port
resetting
restoring communication with improperly configured
Return (Enter) key, 2-6
Primary
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
IN-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
right arrow key, 2-6
proprietary, 4-38
setting
setting up
RJ45, Ethernet Port connector, C-7
RMON
Specific Traps, B-15
router
SLV
Routing
SNMP
S
screen
security, 1-8, 2-1, 2-2, 3-5, 5-1
selecting
software
Service, A
Source
service level
verification
Spacebar, 2-6
standards compliance for SNMP Traps, B-6
starting
Session
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
IN-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Test
Status
Connectivity, 8-20
Timeout
suggestions, user documentation, A
switching
System
Inactivity, 4-34, 4-44
trademarks, A
Training, A
Transmit Clock
Trap
Traps
T
Telnet
July 2000
9783-A2-GB20-00
IN-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
V
V.35
connector, C-6
TruePut technology, 1-10
W
warmStart
events, General Traps, 4-38
U
warranty, A
Web-site
glossary, viii
9783-A2-GB20-00
July 2000
IN-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|